ScriptCase PDF en Us

Introduction Introduction
What is ScriptCase ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Through a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP applications extremely fast with quality, saving time , lowering costs, increasing productivity and team integration.
How does ScriptCase work? The developer can connect ScriptCase to the databases available in the market, such as SQL Server, Oracle, DB2, MYSQL, Postgres, and also create applications using multiple databases.
You will be able to develop easily and really fast: Grid Reports Charts Filters Forms Menus Tabs PDF documents Blank applications Container Calendars
Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components: Ajax Support Auto-complete Master-Details Editable Grid HTML Editor Database Dictionary Documentation creator Installed in a web server, Scriptcase can be simultaneously used by many developers through a browser, allowing remote and collaborative development. The source code is PHP and works independently of the tool, allowing its publishing on any PHP enabled Web server. Source code ScriptCase generates the source-code (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX). The generated source is totally independent of the tool, and can be published on any PHP enabled Web server. The PHP language is free (GNU) and can be used in Windows or Linux (every PHP processing is made in the server).
Extra Tools
ScriptCase brings some extra tools:
SQL Builder
A Tool to assist the SQL creation in wizard form to grid applications. It allows the choice of the database, tables, fields, order by and where clauses, as well as, the built command simulations saved for posterior use.
Database Builder
A Tool to manage your database. A complete database manager tool that allows to build or edit databases, tables and fields.
Data Dictionary
Allows to mantain a data dictionary. It creates data repository, synchronize tables and much more.
Express Edit
System tool to bulk edit applications for faster developement.
Helpcase
Used to create webhelps, standardizing your documentation and helping the end user to understand the system and/or applications.
Buttons Management
Allows systems buttons standardization and centralized features management
Themes Editor
User friendly themes editor to manage CSS settings.
Databases
ScriptCase doesn't execute commands directly in databases. It uses a layer of access - ADODB. This layer makes an abstraction of the database, allowing the use of SQL statements to different databases (ODBC or OLEDB standard). Compatible databases:
Scriptcase Installation Overview

The ScriptCase installation process is described according to the environment type. Requirements Windows Installer (Executable) Windows Manual Installation ( ZIP) Scriptcase Linux Installer ScriptCase Linux (ZIP or GZIP) Installing PHP in IIS5 Installing PHP in IIS6. MacOSX Installation
Requirements
The installation requirements are : 1 - Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more. 2 - PHP 5.3 or higher, with the modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3. 4 - Standard SQL Database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) PHP accessible .* 5 - Java or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or higher installed on the server. * We recommend the database SQLite. The Windows executable installer automatically configures all the requirements described above, with the exception of Java.
Windows Installer
Using the ScriptCase Installer The ScriptCase's Installer automatically installs on your system: 1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.8 2 - PHP 5.3 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3 4 - SQLite Database used by ScriptCase.
Verify the Java JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.3.1 (or higher) installation. Enter: java-version, at the command prompt, to verify if JRE is installed.
The environment is ready when a picture, similar to the picture above, is displayed in response to the Java version installed. To download the installer visit our site at www.scriptcase.net/phpgenerator/download/download.php.
Starting the ScriptCase installation
Run scriptcase_install_en_us_v6.X.XXX.exe.
Read the license agreement terms and click Next.
Select the directory to install the ScriptCase and click Install.
Click finish to complete the installation process.
Read the Readme for important information, such as: the ScriptCase User and Password .
Windows Manual Installation

Requirements : 1 - Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more. 2 - PHP 5.3 or higher, with the modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3. 4 - Standard SQL Database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) PHP accessible .* 5 - Java or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or higher installed on the server. * We recommend the database SQLite.
Verify the Java JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.3.1 (or higher) installation. Type: java-version, at the command prompt, to verify if JRE is installed.
The environment is ready when a picture (similar to the picture above) is displayed in response to the Java version installed.
Related Links: PHP (official site). Zend (Site ). Apache (official site). Download Scriptcase ZIP from our site at www.scriptcase.net.
After configuring your environment, extract the file to a temporary folder. Rename the folder scriptcase.xxx t to scriptcase and move it to the web server root. Finally open the browser and access ScriptCase to start the installation process.
Example: http://server:port/scriptcase
Select the language (English) to use during the installation.
Check enabled extensions. If you check the not installed extensions, so ScriptCase tries to configure the php.ini file to recognize these extensions.
The ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions. Note: The IIS Web server, requires permission to Write, Read and Execute for the user IUSR_SERVERNAME in the following directories: 1 - PHP installation directory . 2 - ScriptCase Directory . 3 - Windows cmd.exe file.
Define the database to install ScriptCase, the default option, SQLite (recommended), requires only that the SQLite PHP module is enabled. It is possible to install in other databases.
*For more information please visit Connecting the database available on the ScriptCase documentation -Documentation.
The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.
Create a login id and password to the ScriptCase administrator
The following information is displayed upon successful installation. Click on Next to start ScriptCase.
ScriptCase login screen.
Linux Installation
Installing ScriptCase in a configured environment. Requirements : 1 - Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more. 2 - PHP 5.3 or higher, with the modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3. 4 - Standard SQL Database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) PHP accessible .* 5 - Java or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or higher installed on the server. * We recommend to use SQLite database. Verify the Java JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.3.1 (or higher) installation. Type: java -version, at the command console, to verify if JRE is installed.
The environment is ready when a picture similar to the picture above is displayed in response to the Java version installed. Related Links: Installing in Unix Environment - (official site). Download Scriptcase ZIP in www.scriptcase.net.
*Note: Before compiling the PHP check the version compilation help . Go to the php configuration file (info.php) to check if the modules are enabled, as pictures below:
Example: ./conImage--help
Zend Optimizer Installed.
Module GD enabled.
Module MBSTRING enabled.
Module ZIP enabled.
After download extract ScriptCase ZIP in the web server root.
Rename the extracted folder to scriptcase.
Change the scriptcase files permissions to read, write and execute recursively (Subdirectories and files )
After configuring the environment, open the browser and access ScriptCase to start the installation process: Example: http://server:port/scriptcase Select the language (English) to use in the installation process.
< Check enabled extensions
. The ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions (chmod 777 scriptcase -R) .
Define the database to install ScriptCase, the default option, SQLite (recommended), requires only that the PHP module is enabled. It is possible to install in other databases.
*For more information please visit Connecting the database available on the ScriptCase documentation -Documentation. The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.
The following information is displayed upon successful installation. Click in Next to start the ScriptCase.
ScriptCase login window.
Instala??o Scriptcase - Linux Installer
ScriptCase Linux - Installer

Using the scriptcase installer Requirements: 1 - JAVA or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or superior installed on the server. *We recomend the use of the SQLite database.
Scriptcase installer, will install automatically in your system: 1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15. 2 - PHP 5.3 with the mbstring, zip and gd activated. 3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3. 4 - Scriptcase Version 6.
* Before we proceed with the installation is recomended to do not have any other environment installed on the machine.
The linux installer is based on the "Zend Server CE 5.2" module, and the installation is made by shell commands. Using Linux gnome PT_BR, the console can be found at: Applications -> Accessories -> Terminal.
Is aways recomended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal. We are going to use the following commands to continue with the installation: CD, SUDO, BASH e LS.
- Step 1: Find the .sh file from the installer accessing the folder and subfolders using the command CD.
To list the folders files we will use the command LS. Ex: user@machine: actual_folder$ cd/installer_folder user@machine: installer_folder$ ls -la
Scriptcase Installer requires a super user to run, normally assigned to the "root" user. - Step 2: Use the SUDO command to obtain permission as SU (super user) this way changing the user. Ex: user@machine: installer_folder$ sudo su
- Step 3: To start the installation use the BASH command. The installer has a shell script thar performs the installation steps. Ex: user@machine: installer_folder$ bash scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v6.0.021.sh * In case you see an error message, give permission to read/write to the file and repeat the bash procedure. Ex: user@machine: installer_folder$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v6.0.021.sh
- Step 4: Set the folder where the Zend Server/Scriptcase files will be copied. By default, the installer will use the path "/opt/nm". To accept the default path press enter or type the new path to
change it.
In the image bellow we are able to see an automatic message from the installer script, informing the path where the Zend HTTP environment was unpacked. We must wait until the end of this processing.
In the image bellow we are able to see an automatic message from the installer script, informing the path where the Scriptcase was unpacked. We must wait until the end of this processing.
In the image bellow we are able to see an automatic message from the installer script, informing the end of the installation showing also a summary. The HTTP service is already up and ready to be used.
- Step 5: Accessing the Scriptcase by the browser. Ex: http://localhost:86/scriptcase. Use Login: admin Password: admin, to have access to Scriptcase.
Will be installed a trial version of scriptcase, it will be avaliable for use for 20 days, if you already have a license key, proceed with the registration. * Scriptcase was installed using the SQLite database.
- Apache Service: The installer will not set the apache to starts automatically when the operating system is initialized. When the machine is restarted, the apache will not be running this way scripitcase will be not able to run. To activate the HTTP service from the apache, will be necessary to edit the zendctl.zh file located in: "../nm/zend/bin/". The Apache will require a imput parameter to run. (Start, Stop or Restart) Ex. sudo /opt/nm/zend/bin/zendctl.sh start
To set the Apache start automatically will be necessary to add a symbolic link inside the file '/etc/rc2.d". Ex. sudo ln -s /opt/nem/zend/bin/zendctl.sh S19zendctl
- WEB Interface - Zend Server: It is a module, avaliable in the environment that simplifies and makes any modifications to the HTTP environment easy.
The interface is also accessed by the browser, gaining access through the port 10082. URL syntax: http://ip_servidor:10082/ZendServer Ex. http://localhost:10082/ZendServer
To access with security the web interface uses SSL on the HTTP protocol (HTTPS). In some browsers you will need to add the exe??o security to continue to access. In case of Mozilla Firefox, add the execption in: "I understand the risks -> Add Exception -> Confirm security Exception * The exception granted will not compromise the safety of your environment.
Steps of the Zend Server CE configuration.
Steps 1 of 3: It is necessary to accept the license term of use required by the Zend. Mark the checkbox "I have read and agreed to the end user license agreement terms" and proceed to the next screen.
Step 2 of 3: The password created is to limit the access of unauthorized persons in the configuration of your environment. We recomend an easy password because to recover that password is not simple.
Step 3 of 3: To add your email address in the "Newsletter" and receive news about releases and updates of the Zend Company.
Optional configuration, in case you do not want the service, uncheck the checkbox "Notify me of new Zend Server Community" and leave the email field blank.
Final Step: Configuration screen of the Zend Server CE environment.
Installing Php In Iis5
Requirements :
1 - IIS5 installed in Windows 2000/XP. 2 - PHP 5.3 or higher, with the modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3. 4 - Standard SQL Database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) PHP accessible .* 5 - Java or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or higher installed on the server. Related Links: PHP Official Site . Zend Site.
Installing PHP in IIS5 Create a directory for PHP (eg: C: \ PHP) and unzip the file php-XXX-win32.zip in that directory. Access the PHP directory and create a subdirectory for the session files (eg C: \ PHP \ temp). In the PHP directory rename the file php.ini-dist to php.ini. Edit the php.ini and make the following changes: extension_dir = "C:\PHP\ext" (Directory with extensions .dlls used by PHP, such as: database modules, ZIP and others). session.save_path = "C:\PHP\tmp" (Directory to house PHP sessions). Uncomment the modules php_gd2.dll, php_mbstring.dll, php_zip.dll in the php.ini and also a database module used to install ScriptCase (eg: php_mysql.dll, php_sqlite.dll among others). Save the changes and close the file. Setting Access Permissions for IIS5. This step is performed repeatedly to configure the environment. To give run permission, open the Windows Explorer and go to Tools / Folder Options. In the View tab uncheck the option use simple file sharing and apply the changes.
Using Windows Explorer, in the PHP tmp directory , click with the right button and select the Security option.
Image1: Click in Add to add the new IIS user ( Defined by IUSR_SERVERNAME).
Image2: Click in advanced to list all possible user.
Image3: Click in Find now to list all server users. Note that this user is a local user, set From this Location (this server itself and not a server domain).
Image4: Select the IUSR_SERVERNAME user and click in OK.
Image5: Give full permission to IIS user (Internet guest account = IUSR_SERVERNAME).
Image6: Repeat the same process for the cmd.exe file located in C: \ WINDOWS \ System32
Image6: And to ScriptCase directory.
PHP Configuration in IIS
Image1: Execute IIS from the Control Panel/Administrative Tools
Image2: Click in the Web Server (in this case Default Web Site) with the right button and select Proprieties.
Image3: In Home Directory, Click in Configuration.
Image4: In Mappings click in Add.
Image5: The PHP is configured in CGI mode - Enter C: / php / php-cgi.exe (assuming that PHP was placed in the directory C: / php) in the Executable text box. Enter . Php in the Extension text box. Check the two last boxes
*Note: to configure PHP in ISAPI mode use php5isapi.dll instead php-cgi.exe
Installing Zend Optimizer Start the Zend Optimizer installation. Select the Web Server - IIS5 (Internet Information Service) - default option already selected. Enter the PHP configuration file (php.ini) location - C: / php / php.ini. Proceed and complete the installation. Image6: Create a file info.php in C:\Inetpub\wwwroot dir with the following lines: <?php phpinfo(); ?> After restarting IIS, use the browser to go to the info.php file as follows: http://servidor:porta/info.php The environment is ready for installation when the PHP information matches the image below:
After completing the settings, install ScriptCase. ScriptCase Windows - Manual Installation
Installing Php In Iis6
Requirements :
1 - IIS6 installed in Windows 2003. 2 - PHP 5.3 or higher, with the modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader v3.3. 4 - Standard SQL Database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) PHP accessible .* 5 - Java or JRE - Java Runtime Environment 1.6.0 or higher installed on the server. Related Links: PHP Official Site . Zend Site. Installing PHP in Windows Server 2003 Create a directory for PHP (eg: C: \ PHP) and unzip the file php-XXX-win32.zip in that directory. Access the PHP directory and create a subdirectory for the session files (eg C: \ PHP \ temp). In the PHP directory rename the file php.ini-dist to php.ini. Edit the php.ini and make the following changes: extension_dir = "C:\PHP\ext" (Directory with extensions .dlls used by PHP, such as: database modules, ZIP and others). session.save_path = "C:\PHP\tmp" (Directory to house PHP sessions). Uncomment the modules php_gd2.dll, php_mbstring.dll, php_zip.dll in the php.ini and also a database module used to install ScriptCase (eg: php_mysql.dll, php_sqlite.dll among others). Save the changes and close the file. Setting Permissions for IIS in the PHPdirectory. This step is performed repeatedly to configure the environment. Using Windows Explorer, in the directory where the PHP was defined, click with the right button and select the S ecurity option. Image1: Click in Add to add the new IIS user ( Defined by IUSR_SERVERNAME).
Image2: Click on "advanced" to list all possible users.
Image3: Click in Find now to list all server users. Note that this user is a local user, set From this Location (this server itself and not a server domain).
Image4: Select the IUSR_SERVERNAME user and click OK.
Image5: Give full permission to IIS user (Internet guest account = IUSR_SERVERNAME).
Configuring the IIS6 to use the PHPextension. Use the PHP-CGI or ISAPI (Recommended) to Configure it. This document uses the ISAPI. Image6: Select the Web Site and with the right button select Properties as in theImage below.
Image7: Click on Configuration.
Image8: Click oin Add to create a new extension pointing to PHP.
Image9: Define the file php5isapi.dll as Executable, find it in the PHP directory. Enter .php for extension. (To use the CGI instead of ISAPI, use the php-cgi.exe that can be found in the same directory.
Enabling the ISAPI extension on IIS6 The ISAPI extension is disabled by default in IIS. Create and enable the PHP extension DLL . Image10: Click in Add New Extension, according to image below.
Image11: Add a name to it ( ex.: ISAPI) and select the php5isapi.dll file from the PHP directory.
Installing the Zend Optimizer Install Zend Optimizer. Select the Web Server - IIS6 (Internet Information Service) - Default Option is already selected. enter the PHP (php.ini) configuration file path - C:/php/php.ini. Continue and complete the installation. Preparing to Install the ScriptCase Download the ZIP ScriptCase (Windows). Unpack the ScriptCase in the root directory of the Web server (C \: inetpub \ wwwroot - check the option the local path - Figure7). Click with the right button of the mouse on the ScriptCase folder and choose Sharing and Security. Use the same procedure to set permissions in the PHP directory as seen above. Image12: Select the ScriptCase directory and choose the option Sharing and Security.
Image13: Give full permission (read, write and execution) to IIS user (Internet guest account = IUSR_SERVERNAME).
Image14: Give to "Internet guest user" permission to execute the cmd.exe file located on system32 dir.
After completing the settings, install ScriptCase. ScriptCase Windows - Manual Installation
Macosx Installation
Installing ScriptCase using Zend Server CE. Requirements : 1 - Apple Mac OS X compatible (versions 10.5 and 10.6). 2 - Zend Server CE (PHP 5.3 recommended) Related Links: Apple Mac OS X (official site). Zend Server CE download site.
Go to the zend server website to download the Zend Server CE dmg file:
After you download, mount the dmg file by clicking on it:
Now, start the installation process clicking on the "Zend Server" icon:
Just follow the steps:
Here you choose which harddrive that you want to install it:
After that installation ends, you need to start Zend Server CE. Open your terminal, and using 'sudo' or login as root you can start it with this command: /usr/local/zend/bin/zendctl.sh start
Now we need to setup Zend Server CE. It's necessary to setup the admin password and enable Zend Guard Loader. But first, accept the license agreement.
Now choose the admin password.
You don't need to inform any email address, just uncheck the notify option.
As you can see, the Zend Server CE is working, but Zend Guard Loader is not enabled, and ScriptCase need it to run. So you need to go to 'Server Setup' to enable it.
On the Zend Guard Loader line, click in "Turn on", then you will see the same page as picture below, asking for ZS restart, and now you can restart.
Now that you have the Zend Server CE working properly, you can install ScriptCase. Download the ScriptCase file for UNIX systems (tgz extension) at http://www.scriptcase.net/phpgenerator/download/download.php and save it on /usr/local/zend/apache2/htdocs, this is the default DocumentRoot location of ZendServer CE apache. As showed on the picture below, open your terminal again as root or using 'sudo' and extract the ScriptCase package.
After that extraction ends, rename the folder to sc6 or scriptcase6 (optional).
Now, open your browser and go the scriptcase url. http://localhost:10088/scriptcase5/. You will start the ScriptCase instalattion process, just folow the steps.
Note: 10088 is the default http port used by apache that comes with Zend Server, you can change it if you want. Select the language (English) to use in the installation process.
< Check enabled extensions
. The ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions (chmod 777 scriptcase -R) .
Define the database to install ScriptCase, the default option, SQLite (recommended), requires only that the PHP module is enabled. It is possible to install in other databases.
*For more information please visit Connecting the database available on the ScriptCase documentation -Documentation. The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.
The following information is displayed upon successful installation. Click in Next to start the ScriptCase.
ScriptCase login window.
Accessing Scriptcase User Authentication

Enter the user login and password at the login page as in the image below. Use the following information to login after a default installation: user : admin password : admin
Image1: Login interface.
After user/password validation and according to user profile, ScriptCase displays the options and projects available to that user.
Note:The ScriptCase user administrator has access to all ScriptCase functionally , including functions to add new users.
Start Page
When accessing Scriptcase, if you don't have any project, you will see a start page with the first steps you should take to create your project.
If you already have a project, you will see a screen to select or create a project.
After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed.
Scriptcase Workspace Layout Overview
Workspace layout Overview

The Scriptcase workspace lets you view applications, object properties and operations available. Using a integrated workspace, all options are into a single larger application window. Once authenticated / logged in the ScriptCase, the user is redirected to a Home page similar to the "Windows Explorer". From there the user can select actions such as: create folders to organize applications, display applications previously created, copy, rename, etc.
Image1: Workspace Layout Interface.
1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List
Main Menu
At the top of the page is available a hierarchical menu containing all ScriptCase functionallity options.
Image1: Main menu interface.
Hierarchic Menu options:
Toolbar
Use the Toolbar icons to access ScriptCase features
ScriptCase functionality icons:
Toolbar - Main menu Home New Project Open Project Close Project New Connecion Edit Connecion SQL Builder New Express Creation Save Generate Source Run Deploy Web Help Logout Return to the Project Home Create a new project Open an existent project Close existent project Create new Connection Edit existing connection Run the tool for building the SQL commands. Create applications through the wizard resource Create applications in batches (express mode). Save the edited application. ( * ) Generate the application source program . (*) Save the application, generate the source program and run it. ( * ) Deploy the application to a sever. ( * ) ScriptCase On-line documentation. All functionality. Exit from ScriptCase.
(*) The options Save, Generate, Run and Deploy are available when an application is being edited.
Other toolbar attributes : User: Display active user name. Project and version: Display selected project / version.
Taskbar
The Taskbar displays the applications opened for editing, allowing to edit more than one application at the same time.
Image1: TaskBar Interface.
Project Explorer
In the Main Menu page are listed the folders and the applications developed with ScriptCase.
Image1: Project Explorer.
1 - Folder functions
It allows to manage folders in the project: Create Create a new folder to organize the project applications. Rename Rename the selected folder. Delete Delete the selected folder.
2 - Filters
It is used to filter applications in the current folder of the project.
All applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders. My applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders developed by the current user. Recents It lists all applications generated recently.
3 - Folders Structure
List of folders and subfolders existing into the project.
4 - Search
Search for applications names or descriptions in the project. The search is done within the selected folder, and the search results are highlighted with yellow.
Applications List
Displays folders and applications. Each line offers action icons at application level.
1 - LABELS
Application Description Creator Generation Status Application Name. Application Description. Application Developer. Date Generation. Application Status (updated e outdated).
2 - OPTIONS
Run Run the application. If it is outdated the source code will be generated before the execution Edit Open the application for editing. Copy Creates an application copy. Enter a name to the copy. Rename Changes the application name.
3 - Footer
It allows to run a function for multiple applications at the same time: The checkbox allows to select all applications listed in the application list.
Other options are: Generate Deploy Delete Copy Move Export Generate the source code. Deploy the applications. Delete the selected applications. Copy the applications to another project. Move the applications to a different folder. Export the applications.
Project Project
Scriptcase uses projects to manage the applications development. A practical and intuitive way of organizing the development environment. The project elements are: the applications (forms, grids, menus, tabs, etc.) and connections to the database. The user can create and maintain a Project Version History, he can link users to projects, themes, languages, and generate source codes, deploy or export part of or all the project, using the Project mangement resources. Within a project you can define patterns to create applications, This topic includes the available resources to project management, which are: New Project Created Projects using Scriptcase Properties Default Values Open Project Delete Versions History Increment Version Generate Source-Code Deploy Export Applications Import Applications Report Show Diagram Application Search Export Projects Import Projects Security Log
New Project
This option is used to create one more project in your ScriptCase framework.
Image1 : New Project.
Image2:Creating a new project.
Attributes: Project Name - Define a name to your project. Blank spaces can't be used there. Project Description -Project short description. Version - Initial Project version. - Select an image to represent your project . - Upload a new image to scripcase.
ScriptCase provides examples of projects demostrating what can be done with the tool. These projects can be downloaded and imported to your Scriptcase.
Locales - Select the languages available in the project from the list and set the project default language. Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to change the project default language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user browser values or the system settings.
Image3: Selecting project locales
Locales - It is the combination of language and regional settings. So a country with more than one language may have a regional setting and more than one language, ex.: English (Canada) and French (Canada). These relationships (locales) are available when creating or editing a project.
Themes - Define themes available to the applications.
Image 4: Selecting themes for the project.
Systems
It is possible to download eight different systems made using Scriptcase, they are: Security System Training/Course Organizer System Online Shop Helpdesk System Project Management System Samples News System Album System
These systems are available for download on the project creating process.
Image 01: Create new project screen.
When importing the systems we have to choose which database Scriptcase will export the system tables. MySQL MySQL (Transaction) SQLite SQL Server (Native SRV) SQL Server (ODBC) Postgres (Over version 7)
Properties
This option changes the projects attributes.
Image1: Project Properties Interface.
Image2: Edit Project Interface.
Attributes: Project Short Description - Update project short description. It is possible also to update the project complete description. Use the textarea with editor features provided by ScriptCase. Select the languages available in the project from ScripCase language list and set the project default language. Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to update the project default language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user browser values or the system settings.
Image3: Selecting project locales
Locales - It is the combination of language and regional settings. So a country with more than one language may have a regional setting and more than one language, ex.: English (Canada) and French (Canada). These relationships (locales) are available at project creation or editing.
Image4: Selecting themes for the project.
Themes - Define schemes available to the applications.
Default Values
Using the Default Values is possible to customize a series of Project attributes, avoiding repetitive tasks and increasing productivity.
Image1: Default Values Access
Image2: Default Settings Interface.
1 - Common Settings:
Logo - Standard logo image used in applications. Records Per Page- Record quantity per page, used in grids and forms applications. Display Line number- . Display Title- . ShowSummary- Display Summary in Grid Applications. It is implemented via an SQL count and as such can add performance overhead .
2 - Application Settings:
There we can set some default values to each type of application, such as: To Set the table width. Select a template to the header and footer.
To set the field aligments. Select which buttons in the toolbar will be available by default when creating an application. etc.
3 - HTML Editor
Configure the toolbar attributes used in 'editor html fields' in form or control application. Attributes: Localization- Define the toolbar position in the editor box. Buttons Alignment - Define the toolbar buttons alignment (right, left or center). Statusbar - Define the toolbar display status. Toolbar Count - Define the toolbar quantity (see image below). Buttons's Organization - Select buttons to display in Toolbar. Preview - Display the selected buttons.
4 - Libraries
Select and enable the libraries to use in applications events.
Open Project
You can open or go from one project to another one anytime acessing the menu File -> Open Project.
Image1: Open Project Menu.
Select to open an existent project.
Image1: Selecting a Project.
Delete
Delete a Project, all applications and connections. Project users are not excluded. Note: Confirm project deletion (Image2) since it is final and not reversible. A project without back-up cannot be restored.
Image1: Delete Project Menu.
Image2: Delete confirmation.
Version History
Maintain project history using Version History. Delete, open/close or edit a project version.
Image 1: Version History Menu.
Image 2: Version Description Interface.
Attributes: Delete - Delete all applications of the Project for selected version. Status - Open/Close a version of the Project. Edit - Edit the version of the Project. Only available if the versions status is "Open"
After clicked to 'Edit' a release, Scriptcase opens that project release.
Image2: Versions Description of Scriptcase interface.
Increment Version
Increment version allows to manager the Project development, by separating the versions that has been developed.
Image 1: Increment Version Menu.
When a new project version is generated, it will keep a copy of the previous version, allowing the development of the new version.
Image 2: Increment Version Interface.
Attributes: Current version - Current Version of the Project. New Version - Id number of the New Version. Description - Project Description.
Generate Source-code
Generate the project applications source code.
Image1: Select application Menu.
It allows to generate the entire project source code or selected applications. If the option Selected applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder.
Deploy
The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP supported WEB server.
For more information, Click here.
Export Applications
Image 1: Export Project Menu
It allows to export all applications of the project or just selected applications. If the option Select applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder. Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 2: Routine backup Interface .
Import Applications
Use it to upload and import an exported zip file to your project.
Image 1: Import Applications Menu.
Select the zip file that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image 2: Import Applications Interface.
Check the list of applications contained in the zip. Click on Restore, then click OK after finish the process.
Report
Provide two types of project report: Applications List and Developers summary.
Image1: Project Reports Menu
Applications List
The Applications List displays historical and analytical information about the project applications.
Image2: Applications List.
The Applications List allows to display all the table inserts (SQL) existing in the project.
Clicking in SHOW INSERTS, the following screen is displayed.
Image4: Applications insert Interface.
Image5: Table Insert Interface.
Developers summary
The Developers summary report display a developer application distribution in a detail or chart format.
Image6: Report (Summary by Developers) Interface.
Show Diagram
Image1: Show Diagram.
Image2: Diagram.
Application Search
Search for an attribute in all applications:
Image1: Application Search Menu.
Image2: Application Search Interface.
Export Project
Use this option to save the project and all project applications in a zip file that you can import in another ScriptCase.
Image 1: Export Project Application Menu.
Select the project to export.
Image 2: Export Application Interface.
Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 3: Routine backup Interface .
Import Project
Use it to upload and import a zip exported file to your open project.
Image: Import Applications Interface.
Step 1 - Select the zip with Project that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image1: Import Applications Interface.
Security
Making use of ScriptCase security resources you can implement access rules for the system being developed, further decreasing development time of a project, considering that the ScriptCase will generate access applications and all validations automatically.
Image 1: Security Module Menu.
1. Type - The First step is used to select the level of security. There are three security levels and each level is based on a data model for storing information such as user accounts, passwords, access profiles, groups, etc.
Image2: Security Module - Type.
Types: User - It creates an application based on security for user level. Where the application is linked to user login. Application - It creates an application based on the application level security. Where the application is related to the user. Group - It creates an application based on security for the Group level. Where is defined the access of each group to certain applications.
2. Select Connection - The Second step is common for any Type and it is used to select what database connection will be used to create the Security module.
Image 3: Security Module - Select Connection.
Select Connection: Connection - Select a database connection from the project. Existing or Create Tables - You can choose if Scriptcase will create the tables in your database or it it will use existent tables. Table prefix - Prefix used to create the table names. Delete tables if they exist. - Delete the tables to create new ones.
3. Associate - The Third step is different to each Type of security level and it is used to associate the fields from the security module with the fields from database. So it is just needed if you have selected the option to use "Existing Tables" in the last step.
User
Based on user level security. Where the application is linked to user login.
Image 4: User Interface.
User: Table - Define the table "Users" used by the system. Login - Set the field to stores the User login. Password - Set the field to stores the User Password. Name - Set the field to stores the User Name. E-mail - Set the field to stores the E-mail.
Active - Set the field to stores if the user is active or not. Activation code - Set the field to stores the Activation code. Administrator privilege - Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.
User / App
Based on application level security. Where the applications is related to the user.
Image 5: User / App Interface.
1 - User: Table - Define the table "Users" used by the system. Login - Set the field to stores the User login. Password - Set the field to stores the User Password. Name - Set the field to stores the User Name. E-mail - Set the field to stores the E-mail. Active - Set the field to stores if the user is active or not. Activation code - Set the field to stores the Activation code. Administrator privilege - Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.
2 - Application: Table - Set the table to store all project applications. Code - Define the field to store the code or the application name. Description - Set the field to store the application description. Type of application - Set the field to store the application type.
5 - User / Application:
Table - Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications. Login - Define the field to store the User Login. Application Name - Define the field to store the application name. Access Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to access the application. Insert Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to insert new records in the application. Delete Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to delete records in the application. Update Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to update records in the application. Export Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to export records in the application. Print Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to print records in the application.
User / Group / App

Based on security for the Group level. Where is defined the access of each group to certain applications. <IMG SRC="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv6/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0055_seg_user_grp.png"">
Image 6: User / Group / App Interface.
1 - User: Table - Define the table "Users" used by the system. Login - Set the field to stores the User login. Password - Set the field to stores the User Password. Name - Set the field to stores the User Name. E-mail - Set the field to stores the E-mail. Active - Set the field to stores if the user is active or not. Activation code - Set the field to stores the Activation code. Administrator privilege - Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.
2 - Group: Table - Set the table to stores the groups created in the system. ID - Define the field that will store the group code. Description - Set the field that will store the group description.
3 - Application: Table - Set the table to store all project applications. Code - Define the field to store the code or the application name. Description - Set the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Set the field to store the application type.
4 - User / Group: Table - Set the table to store the relationship between users and groups in the project. Login - Set the field to store your login. Group Code - Define the field to store the group code.
5 - Group / Application: Table - Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications. Group Code - Define the field to store the group code. Application Name - Define the field to store the application name. Access Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to access the application. Insert Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to insert new records in the application. Delete Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to delete records in the application. Update Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to update records in the application. Export Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to export records in the application. Print Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to print records in the application.
4. Configuration - The fourth step is used to inform the settings used on the security module.
Image 7: Settings Interface
1 - General: Prefix applications - Create the security applications with a prefix in the name. Encryption - Define if the password will use encryption. Enable Security - Enable the option "use security" in each application. Use Captcha - Enable the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen. Folder - It creates a folder in the project to security applications. Theme - Define the theme to the applications. Log - Define the Log Scheme used in the security applications. Menu - It allows to create or select a Menu application to include the security module. Menu Type - Define the Menu type, if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item above. 2 - Login: Minimum size - Minimum size of characters typed by the user. Maximum size - Maximum size of characters typed by the user. Send e-mail link for new password - Define wich characters the end-user can type. 3 - Retrieve Password: Send email with password - Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving it by e-mail. Reset password and send new email - Define if the user can retrieve the password reseting the old and receiving a new one by e-mail. Send e-mail link for new password - Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving a link by email to register a new password. 4 - New Users: Allows the registration of new users - A link is created on the login screen allowing the new users registration. Requires activation by email - New users receive an activation link by email. Send email to administrator - When a new user is registered, the administrator receives an email to allows or not that user to access the system. 5 - E-mail Settings: SMTP Server - Define the SMTP server. SMTP Port - Define the SMTP port. SMTP User - Define the SMTP user. SMTP Password - Define the SMTP password. SMTP E-mail - Define the SMTP e-mail.
5. Insert data - The fifth step is used to populate the tables Users and Groups.
Image 8: Insert Data Interface
Insert data: Login - User Login. Password - User password. Name - User name E-mail - User e-mail. Active - Activate the user. Administrator privileges - Define if the user has administrator privileges ( all features enabled ). Group - Name of the administrator group.
6. Add applications - The sixth step is used to populate the table Applications.
Note: This step is not needed if you are using the "User" security type.
Image 9: Add Applications Interface
Checking the option, Scriptcase will insert in the Applications Table, the name of each application existing in the project.
7. Profile - The last step is used to save in a profile all settings used on the steps to be used in other projects.
Image 10: Profile Interface
You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user, just to that user or just to be used in that project.
Log
Making use of ScriptCase Log resources you can implement a complete Log system to your projects. Storing all data that was updated or deleted by the end-user and which applications they are accessing.
Image 1: Log Module Menu
Create / Edit
This option is used to create or modify a new scheme of Log module to your project.
Image 2: Creating a Log Scheme.
Once you already have a Log Scheme created, they will be listed to be edited or erased.
Image 3: Log Scheme List.
Applications
Here we can define which applications and events will be tracked. At the top we can apply actions to all lines or we can though the list and select an action to each line individually.
Image 4: Applications Interface.
At the bottom of the page we have options to filter the applications that are being listed.
Image 5: Toolbar on the bottom.
Connecting Your Database Connecting Scriptcase To Your Database
CONNECTING YOUR DATABASE
Access DB2 DBF Firebird Informix Interbase MySQL Oracle PostgresSQL MS SQL Server - Windows MS SQL Server - Linux SQLite SQLite PDO SyBase Foxpro
Access Ms Access
Home >> Connections >> MS-Access Requirements: * The database Access (File .MDB) should be in the same web server where PHP is installed on; * Windows must have installed MDAC28SDK or newer (Windows 2000 already exceed the standard in the installation); * Access databases using security (user and password) can only connect using ODBC.
The Connection with Access Database in ScriptCase can be done in two ways: ADO or ODBC.
Connecting Access via ADO. Connecting Access via ODBC.
Connecting Access Via Ado

Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ADO To connect your Access Database using ADO, check the phpinfo () if the COM option is enabled. If not install the package MDAC28SDK and restart your machine. When the option is enabled in the COM Diagnosis proceed with the establishment of the connection
Use the following ADO driver:
Accdb
Extension
MicroSoft
Access
Driver
(*mdb,
*accdb)
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of the MS Access database.
Step 3: In the picture below, fill in the required specifications:
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS type - Set the type of the DBMS is ADO or ODBC. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not. PATH - PATH Newsletter Archive. MDB (This file is on server where is installed ScriptCase). Username - Enter the user to gain access to your MS Access. Password - Enter the password to get access to your MS Access. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Filter - Clicking this option, the following screen appears:
View - Allows viewing of filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Allows you to define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully", then complete the establishment of the connection. If there is any connection fails, review the fields filled in, especially the user, and password server path.
Connecting Access Via Odbc

Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ODBC To create a connection using ODBC, we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control Panel (The ODBC should be created in the same server where it is located the web server). Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator, select the tab System DNS (see image below) and create your connection with your Access Database.
To work with MS Access version inferior than 2007/2010 you should install 2007 Office System Driver: Data Connectivity Components. If you are using Windows 7 x64, you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32.exe to create the ODBC.
Use the following ODBC driver:
Accdb
Extension
MicroSoft
Access
Driver
(*mdb,
*accdb)
MDB
Extension
MicroSoft
Access
Driver
(*mdb)
After creating the ODBC, follow the steps below to create the connection:
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS)
Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.
Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of the MS Access database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS type - Set the type of the DBMS : ADO or ODBC. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. ODBCName - Enter the ODBC created in the Windows Control Panel. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Show - Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection.
Db2 Ibm Db2

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2
Windows IBM DB2 database connection.
To build the ibm_db2 extension, the DB2 application development header files and libraries must be installed on your system. DB2 does not install these by default, so you may have to return to your DB2 installer and add this option. The header files are included with the DB2 Application Development Client freely available for download from the IBM DB2 Universal Database IBM DB2 Universal If you add the DB2 application development header files and libraries to a Linux or Unix operating system on which DB2 was already installed, you must issue the command db2iupdt -e to update the symbolic links to the header files and libraries in your DB2 instances. ibm_db2 is a ? PECL extension, (Repository for PHP Extensions, providing a directory of all known extensions and hosting facilities for downloading and development of PHP extensions) so follow the instructions in Installation of PECL extensions o install the ibm_db2 extension for PHP. Issue the configure command to point to the location of your DB2 header files and libraries as follows:
bash$ ./configure --with-IBM_DB2=/path/to/DB2
On the links below select the desired option
Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 Native). Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Native). Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Generic).
Ibm Db2 Native
IBM DB2 Connection

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 Native
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using Native Driver
Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the DB2 database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the model of the DBMS is Native, ODBC or native ODBC Generic. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Database Name - Enter the DB2 database instance name. Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection , click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. i5_lib - Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System. Filter - Clicking this option, the following screen appears:
Show - Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed.
Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection.
Ibm Db2 Odbc Native
IBM DB2 Connection.

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Native
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Native driver.
Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the model of the DBMS is Native, ODBC or native ODBC Generic. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Database Name - Enter the DB2 database instance name. Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the user valid password.
For more details on configuring the database connection , click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. i5_lib - Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System. Filter - Clicking this option, the following screen appears:
Ibm Db2 Odbc Generic
IBM DB2 Connection.

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Generic
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Generic driver.
Step 1: Use Windows Data Source Administrator to create ODBC, select System DSN.
Step 1.2: Select DB2 ODBC Driver.
Step 1.3: Enter ODBC name and select the database used.
Step 1.4: Configure ODBC.
Step 1.5: Enter database user name and password and test the ODBC.
Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the model of the DBMS is Native, ODBC or native ODBC Generic. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. ODBC Name - Enter the ODBC name created in the Control Panel. Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection , click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Filter - Clicking this option, the following screen appears:
Firebird Firebird
Home >> Connections >> Firebird Select the desired option on the links below.
Connecting to Firebird in Windows. Connecting to Firebird in Windows using ODBC. Connecting to Firebird in Linux. Creating a Connection on Scriptcase. Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC.
Firebird - Windows
Creating a Firebird database Connection in Windows

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows Requirements: Enable interbase.dll module in php.ini Edit Windows services file and add gds_db on 3050/tcp port.
Edit the php.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located.
In the PHP.INI, look for the word php_interbase.dll and remove the comment ";" to enable this module. See image.
Check if interbase module was enabled correctly. http://server:port/scriptcase/info.php
Edit Windows services file fix an error when try to connect to FireBird using ScriptCase: "Unable to complete network request to host "localhost". Failed to locate host machine. Undefined service gds_db/tcp". Open services file (you can find it at in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\). Then add the following line: gds_db 3050/tcp # Firebird Save and create a ScriptCase connection. ScriptCase 6 runs on PHP 5.3. This version of PHP had a few issues while connecting with Firebird database. To solve this connection issues, please do the following: 1 - Download this file and extract it on PHP extension folder (by default, it is "C:\Program Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\lib\phpext"): http://www.netmake.com.br/knowledge/download/php_dll_firebird.zip 2 - Download this file and extract it on Zend Server Binary folder (by default, it is "C:\Program Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\bin"): http://www.netmake.com.br/knowledge/download/dll_firebird.zip
3 - Add these lines on your Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\etc"): extension=php_interbase.dll extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll
php.ini
(by
default,
it
is
located
at
"C:\Program
4 - Restart your server and you will be able to connect with Firebird (Interbase).
Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase.
Firebird - Odbc
Creating a Firebird database connection Using ODBC

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows using ODBC
Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC
To create the connection using (http://www.ibphoenix.com) is required.
the
IBPhoenix
Open
Source
ODBC
Driver
Download and install the driver, create a new ODBC Source as System Source, and choose Firebird/Interbase driver.
Connect to a firebird, running in another server (glacial) as in the example below.
Data Source Name: ODBC Name Database: HOST:PATH Enter the user name and password.
Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC.
Firebird - Linux
Creating a Firebird database connection on Linux

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Linux Configuring Firebird/Interbase on Linux Requirements: To enable PHP to work with Firebird/InterBase, compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option. For more information, check php website at http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.ibase.php
Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase.
Firebird - Creating A Connection
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD)
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the Firebird database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Select the DBMS type. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) - Enter the FireBird Server. Database Name - Enter your database name. Username - Enter a valid username. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection , click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema before the table name - Use schemas before the tables names. Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC
To create the connection using (http://www.ibphoenix.com) is required.
the
IBPhoenix
Open
Source
ODBC
Driver
Download and install the driver, create a new ODBC Source as System Source, and choose Firebird/Interbase driver.
Connect to a firebird, running in another server (glacial) as in the example below.
Data Source Name: ODBC Name Database: HOST:PATH Enter the user name and password.
Firebird - Creating A Connection Using Odbc
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD ODBC)
Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right a screen to create connection, click on the image of the Generic ODBC.
Connection Name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Defined as Generic ODBC. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not. ODBC Name - Enter the name of your database. Username - Enter a valid username. Password - Enter the user valid password.
For more details on configuring the database connection click
Informix Informix
Home >> Connections >> Informix This tutorial let the user connect to a Windows server where Scriptcase is installed with another one where the database is. The first step is to install the Informix client. Here we are using the IBM Informix Connect. We wil describe the native and ODBC connection.
Connecting with Informix PDO in Scriptcase. (recomended) Configuring Informix Native. Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase. Configuring Informix ODBC. Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase.
Configuring Informix Native

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix Native Client image used by connections.
Database images used by connections.
In the Windows services file add the Informix Service (Name and Port).
Client(Setnet32) Configuration. IBM Informix Server: Server Name used by connection. HostName: IP/Host Database Server. Protocolname: Protocol used. Service Name: Service Name.
Enter IP/Host Database Server user name and password.
Verify if the database server is accessible using client DBPing.
Using I-Connect verify the connection.
Enabling Informix in the PHP Step 1: Enable Informix PHP Module in the configuration file (php.ini)
Step 2: Accessing the info.php and verify if the module was enabled.
If the Informix module is loaded correctly in your php, you already can access ScriptCase to create your connection.
Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase.
Connecting With Informix Native In Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of Informix database.
Connection Name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type as Informix or Informix PDO.
Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) - Tell Informix Server. Database Name - Enter your database (actual base) name. Username - Enter a valid username. Password - Enter a valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection, click
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection. Check if the module is properly enabled for PHP.
Configuring Informix Native.
Configuring Informix Odbc

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix ODBC Step 1: Create the ODBC using the database driver as in the pictures:
Step 2: Enter the ODBC (Data Source Name) used by connection.
Step 3: Enter the connection data and test it.
If the ODBC datasource was created correctly, you already can access ScriptCase to create your connection.
Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase.
Connecting With Informix Odbc In Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right a screen to create connection, click on the image of the Generic ODBC.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Defined as ODBC Generic. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not.
ODBC Name - Enter your database name (actual base name). Username - Enter a valid username. Password - Enter the user valid password.
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection. If you still get errors, check if the ODBC Data Source has been properly established.
Configuring Informix ODBC.
Configuring Informix Pdo

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix PDOz' To create a connection on Scriptcase using Infomix PDO is necessary to follow the steps bellow. * To use the infomix is necessary to have the "Infomix Instant Client" installed on you mahcine.
Step 1: If you already have Scriptcase installed make a full backup of it inside Options > Settings > Backup. Uninstall Scriptcase completely.
Step 2: Download the Zend Server CE with PHP 5.3 at Zend Page.
Step 3: Run the Zend installer and select the "Custom" option.
Step 4: Enable the "Zend Guard Loader" and the "Infomix" extensions.
Proceed with the installation pressing next a few times, the Zend installer will install the Zend Guard Loader, Apache and PHP creating a small environment. We must enable the check box to run the Zend after the installation, at this time the browser will open to proceed with the installation.
Step 5: Now we must activate the Infomix extension in the Zend, so we must type: localhost:10081 .
Into the "Server Setup" tab, then into the Extensions tab, we must look for the pdo_infomix and turn it on.
We can't forget to restart the PHP.
Step 6: Now we must install Scriptcase using the zip file on the HTDOCS folder.
Remember to rename the folder after the Scriptcase zip file get uncompressed and now we are ready to install Scriptcase in the new Environment. Manual Installation Tutorial. Create your first project, select the Infomix PDO connection and use this structure as host: ip\service_name:port Example: 192.168.254.130\ol_ids_1150_1:9088 * We cant use "localhost", we must use the IP of your machine on the network.
Step 7: Save the connection and create an application (form or grid), try to run your application using the default values, one error about the time zone will appear this way you can copy your time zone from the error and paste it into the php.ini file after the date.timezone tag like the picture bellow.
Step 8: SRestart you apache and your Scriptcase will be ready to be used.
Interbase Interbase
Home >> Connections >> Interbase In this tutorial we will see how to enable the PHP module "php_interbase.dll" in php.ini and then connect to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Enabling Interbase in PHP(Windows). Enabling Interbase in PHP(Linux). Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Configuring Interbase On Windows

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Windows
See how to do it step by step:

Edit the php.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located.
In PHP.INI, look for the word php_interbase.dll and remove the comment ";" to enable this module. See image below.
Check if interbase module was enabled correctly. http://server:port/scriptcase/info.php
If the module INTERBASE is loaded correctly in your php, go through ScriptCase to create your connection.
Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Configuring Interbase On Linux

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Linux Requirements: To enable PHP to work with InterBase, compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option. For more information, check php website at http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.ibase.php
Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Connecting To Interbase From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the Interbase database.
Connection Name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the version of the DBMS type. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not.
IP: PATH - Enter the IP Server path. Username - Enter a valid user name. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection, click
If the connection was not successful, verify that the PHP module is enabled: Enabling the PHP Interbase(Windows). Enabling the PHP Interbase(Linux).
Mysql Mysql
Home >> Connections >> MySQL The Scriptcase installer enable the MySQL module in the PHP by default, then you just need to connect from Scriptcase to the database. If you are using your own environment, you must be sure if the MySQL extension is enabled in the PHP.
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX). Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Mysql (windows)
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS)

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (WINDOWS) To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module we must edit the PHP.ini file. Run the PHP info function to check the php.ini file location according to image below.
In the PHP.INI file, look for the php_mysql.dll and remove the ";" to enable the MySQL module in PHP. Remember to restart the web server. See image below.
To connect to MySQL database, check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the MySQL module is enabled, see image1. If not, edit the file php.ini and enable the MySQL module (php_mysql.dll). Problems enabling MySQL extension on Windows
When using the Apache Web server with PHP ISAPI, in many cases the MySQL 5 extension is not enabled. This error occurs because Windows cannot find the DLL libmysql.dll which is located in the folder "bin" on the MySQL installation folder. Copy this DLL to the system32 Windows directory and restart the Services.
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase: Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Mysql (linux)
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX)

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (LINUX) To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module on a Linux environment we must compile PHP with the option mysql (see description below). Setting MySQL with PHP4: The option --with-mysql is enabled by default. This is the standard operation and can be disabled by setting --without-mysql. If MySQL is activated without specifying the path to the MySQL installation directory, PHP will use the MySQL client library. Users running other applications that use MySQL (for example, auth-mysql) should not use the library built, but instead only specify the MySQL path to the installation directory, like this: -with-mysql=/path/to/MySQL. This will force the PHP to use the customer libraries installed by MySQL. Setting MySQL with PHP5: MySQL is not active by default, neither the MySQL library is built in PHP. Use the option --with-mysql[= DIR] to enable MySQL extension. Restart the web server. For other settings, visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/pt_BR/ref.mysql.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase: Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase.
Connecting To Mysql From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Connecting to MySQL from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of the MySQL database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: transactional or not. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) -Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.
Port - Set the port to be used for your connection. By Default port is 3306. Database Name - Enter the MySQL database instance name. Username - Enter a valid database user name. If you are connecting with a remote database server, check if the database user has remote access. Password - Enter the valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Show - Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection. If you have problem to connect, check if the MySQL module is enabled in the PHP:
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX).
Oracle Oracle
Home >> Connections >> Oracle To connect with the Oracle Database it is necessary to install and configure some Oracle addons. On the links below we must choose the desired operating system.
Connecting to Oracle using instant client for windows. Oracle in linux environment. Enabling the Oracle on the PHP. Creating a connection on Scriptcase.
Oracle - Instant Client
Creating an Oracle database connection in ScriptCase

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Instant Client (WINDOWS) This tutorial describe the steps necessary to connect with ScriptCase using Oracle Instant Client in Windows and the PHP configuration. Instant Client allows to connect to all Oracle versions.
Requirements: *Download 'Oracle Instant Client Basic Package' (http://www.oracle.com) (Aproved from version 8 until version 11.2.0.3); Grant Access to Oracle database; Configure the PHP for Oracle.
Installing Oracle Instant Client
Step 1: Unzip the .zip file downloaded to any directory (Ex: c:\instantclient_10_2).
Step 2: Enter the Instant Client in Windows environment variable 'Path' location. Click with the right button on My Computer, then Properties, tab Advanced --> Environment Variables. Edit the variable 'Path' and enter theOracle Instant Client path. Add the variable 'NLS_LANG', used to set the language. (See images below). When a value already exist in the 'Path', add ; (semicolon) at the end of line and the instant client path. It is necessary to restart the machine. Follow the images below. Picture 1: Right click on the "My Computer" icon the properties menu
Picture 2: At the "Advanced" tab we must click on the "Environment Variable" button.
Picture 3: Once we are inside the "Environment Variables" menu, we must search for the "Path" variable and edit it.
Picture 4: We will add the path to the instant client folder that we just created, we must add ";" (semicolon) to separate the existant data from the new data that we are going to insert. Ex: ;C:\instantclient_11_1
Picture 5: We must add a new system variable.
Picture 6: We must set the variable name as "NLS_LANG", the oracle will use this environment variable used to define language, territory and character set properties. In this link we will see a list with some of the variables. http://www.orafaq.com/wiki/NLS_LANG Here is a list with some of those language variables: French_France.WE8ISO8895P French_Switzerland.WE8ISO8895P1 Norwegian_Norway.NDK7DEC Norwegian_Norway.WE8ISO8895P1 Japanese_Japan.JA16SJIS Arabic_Egypt.AR8MSWIN1256 American_America.AR8MSWIN1256 American_America.WE8ISO8859P1 Latvian_Latvia.BLT8CP921
Note: Restart the server to activate the Environment Variables.
Note 2: The way to get into the environment variables may be different depending on the windows version.
Once that the instant client is successfully we must certificate that the Oracle DLL is up into the PHP configuration: Enabling the Oracle on the PHP.
Oracle - Linux
Connecting to Oracle in Linux Environment

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Linux
Installing the Instant Client When the Scriptcase is installed in Linux environment the Oracle DLL is enable, to perform a connection it is needed to install the Instant Client </ a> for Linux.
Step 1: In the Oracle's website we will choose the desiredoperating system and then download the "Instant CLient Basic Package".
Step 2: Uncompress the zip file.
Step 3: Let's edit /etc/environment.
Step 4: We must add the path to the folder that we just created, remember to separate what we will enter with ":" (colon).
After the four steps scriptcase is ready to make a connection to the Oracle database. Creating a connection on Scriptcase.
Oracle - Enabling The Php
Enabling the PHP

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Enabling the PHP. PHP SETTINGS To enable oracle module in PHP, remove the comment in php.ini file. Find the extension=php_oci8.dll line and remove the comment at the beginning of the line ";". Restart the web server if php is not configured as cgi.
Check if the module was really loaded opening our 'diagnosis.php' or 'info.php'. Example: diagnosis.php
info.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to Oracle from Scriptcase: Creating a connection on Scriptcase.
Oracle - Creating A Connection On Scriptcase
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Connecting from scriptcase. CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (ORACLE)
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right a screen to create connection, click on the image of the Oracle database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Oracle version used. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. TSNAME - Inform the IP of the server where the database is installed and the instance name created in the Oracle installation. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the valid password.
For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema before the table name - Use schemas before the tables names. Client encoding - Encoding used on your database Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Postgresql Postgressql
Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL To connect with PostgreSQL in Scriptcase you should enable the PHP extensions/module php_pgsql.dll in php.ini file.
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX). Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Mysql (windows)
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS)

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (WINDOWS) Edit the PHP.ini file. Run the phpinfo() function to check the php.ini file location according to the image below.
In the PHP.INI file, search for php_pgsql.dll and remove the ";" to enable the module PostGreSQL in PHP. See image below.
Make sure the PostGreSQL module was enabled. See Diagnosis.
Creating a connection in Windows Server To connect to PostGreSQL database, check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the PostGreSQL module is enabled, see image1. If not, edit the file php.ini and enable the PostGreSQL module (php_pgsql.dll). If the connection is made in a different server from where PostGresSQL is located, you must check if the "Allow Access Foreign" is marked.
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase: Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Postgresql (linux)
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX)

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (LINUX) To enable the module for PostgreSQL, the option --with-pgsql[=DIR] should be used when compiling the PHP. For other settings visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.pgsql.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase: Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.
Connecting To Postgresql From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.
Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of the PostgreSQL database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - PostgreSQL version used. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Database Name - Enter the PostgreSQL database instance name. Username - Enter a valid database user name . Password - Enter the valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed.
If you have problem to connect, check if the PostgreSQL module is enabled in the PHP:
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX).
Sql Server Ms Sql Server
MS SQL Server connection on Scriptcase (Windows Environment) can be made in 4 different ways:
ADO ODBC SQL Server Client Native SRV
MS-SQL Server Compatibility Win Win Win Win 7 Win XP Server Server Vista 2003 2008 OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Win 2000
OK OK OK
Linux
OK
To make the connection in ScriptCase installed on a Linux Environment, and a MSSQL Database on a Windows Server, use the FreeTDS Library www.freetds.org SQL Server in Linux
Ms Sql Server Ado
Connecting to MS SQL Server using ADO

To connect your SQL Server using ADO, verify the Diagnosis ( main menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the COM option is enable, see image1. If you have problems with the COM option, make sure the MDAC is properly installed on this computer. It is recommended version 2.6 or higher. * The ScriptCase.exe installer that you can download from our site already configures everything needed to use this module.
Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ADO) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection to the MSSQL database.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of MSSQL server database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: ADO, ODBC or Native SRV. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. DBMS Host or IP - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Database - Enter the MSSQL. database instance name. User - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click .
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed.
Note: When connecting ScriptCase via ado with SQL Server to another server you need to check the port block settings to the SQL server database where the Firewall is installed. The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. To change or add a new port we must use comma.
Ms Sql Server Odbc
Creating a MS SQL Server connection using ODBC

To create a SQL Server connection using a data source ODBC, we must create a System ODBC Connection. Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources (The ODBC must be created in the same Host where ScriptCase is installed ). Follow the steps below to create a new connection using ODBC: * The driver that enables access to odbc by PHP is compiled in 32 bits. When using Windows 64 bits environment, it is necessary to create the odbc by "odbcad32.exe" application in the folder "../windows/syswow64/". Example: c:/windows/syswow64/odbcad32.exe
Note: We are using the ODBC driver from the "SQL Native Client" installed in the machine. ( http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877 )
Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ODBC) We will now access the ScriptCase by the browser and we'll create the connection to the MSSQL database. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of MSSQL server database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection.
DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: ADO, ODBC or Native SRV. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. ODBC Name - Enter the MSSQL database instance name. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends Use the schema before the table name - Use schemas before the tables names. Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures. Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection.
Ms Sql Server Client
Requirements: Enable extension/module mssql.dll in php.ini (remove the comment in the line) MS-SQL Server installed on the same machine
Uncomment the extension in php.ini php_mssql.dll
Ms Sql Server Native Srv
Using Native SRV Driver in Windows Environment

The Native SRV connection is the recommended alternative to use with ScriptCase. It is faster (regarding database access) and it is the only that work properly with image and document database fields. Below are step-by-step instructions for installing the Native SRV driver: Required: Operating Systems * Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 * Windows XP Service Pack 3 * Windows Vista Service Pack 1 or later * Windows Server 2008 * Windows Server 2008 R2 * Windows Seven Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installed (sqlncli) http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877 SQLServerDriverForPHP Driver installed ( already installed by Scriptcase Installer ) http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/sqlserver/cc299381.aspx
First Step: Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installation (sqlncli) After downloading the file "sqlncli.msi", execute and follow the installer steps
*After installation, it is recomended reboot the operating system.
Second Step: Installing the Driver - SQLServerDriverForPHP

Note: This step is not necessary if you have used the Scriptcase Installer.
After executing the "SQLServerDriverForPHP", inform the php "ext" folder's path according to the image below.
The installer will extract "dlls" that will be used by php to start the service. After Installation, it is necessary to enable in php.ini the following dll: php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.dll and php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc9.dll Example: extension=php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.dll * It is necessary to include the statement above after calling the extension php_mssql.dll in the php.ini
After edit the file "php.ini", it is necessary reboot the service of "apache" inside : "Control Painel-> Administrative Tools-> Service-> ApacheScriptcase6".
Final Step: Create the connection mssql SRV in scriptcase v5. To create the connection, choose the option: MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV
Note: The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. To change or add a new port we must use comma.
Mssql No Linux(freetds)
SQL Server no Linux

Pr requisitos:
Neste tpico iremos ver como conectar o ScriptCase com SQLServer usando o ambiente pr configurado do XAMPP.
Possuir acesso a base de dados SQLServer. Ter o PHP configurado com o FreeTDS.
Nota: O Pacote XAMPP possui o FreeTDS na sua lista de produtos, mas caso queira configurar o FreeTDS entre no site http://www.freetds.org/
1 Efetuando o Download do XAMPP

1.1 Nesta imagem voc pode ver o site apachefriends.org, onde podemos baixar o XAMPP.
1.2 Fazendo o download direto atravs do wget
Download efetuado com sucesso.
2 Instalando o XAMPP
2.1 Vamos mover o XAMPP para o diretrio '/opt'.
2.2 Utilizando o comando 'tar -xzvf' vamos descompactar o arquivo do XAMPP.
Arquivo descompactado com sucesso.
2.3 Iniciando os servios do XAMPP
2.4 Agora basta acessar a partir do seu servidor Linux '/'
2.5 Acessando o arquivo info.php e checando as configuraes do mdulo mssql.
3 Efetuando o Download do Ambiente de Produo
3.1 Configurando o Ambiente de Produo
O ambiente de produo uma biblioteca de funes comuns usadas nas aplicaes geradas pelo ScriptCase, deve ser usado e configurado junto aos sistemas publicados. Para mais informaes sobre publicao acesse o tpico Esquema de Publicao.
Na imagem abaixo podemos visualizar o link direto para download do ambiente de produo.
3.2 Copiando o Ambiente de Produo ScriptCase para seu servidor WEB
Copiando e descompactando o arquivo '.zip' na a raiz do servidor web dando origem ao ambiente de produo.
3.3 Renomeando o diretrio para 'prod_scriptcase' e dando permisso total para este diretrio.
4 Configurando o FreeTDS
4.1 FreeTDS uma biblioteca que possibilita a conexo com MS SQLServer a partir de uma estao Linux.
Dentro do diretrio '/opt/lampp/etc' existe um arquivo chamado 'freetds.conf', este o arquivo de configurao do FreeTDS.
4.2 Acessando o arquivo de configurao do FreeTDS:
As configuraes usadas no nosso caso esto destacadas. [SQLSERVER] --> o nome que vai fazer referncia ao meu servidor de Banco de Dados. host --> o IP do meu servidor de banco de dados. port --> a porta onde est instalado o meu Banco de Dados. tds version --> a verso do meu SQLServer.
5 Criando uma Conexo a partir do meu Ambiente de Produo

5.1 Acessando o ambiente de produo atravs da URL --> '/scriptcase/prod/'
Acessando o ambiente de produo com a senha padro 'scriptcase'.
5.2 Alterando a senha padro do ambiente de produo.
5.3 Criando uma nova conexo.
5.4 Selecionando o SGBD.
5.5 Definindo o modo de acesso ao banco.
5.6 Informando o nome de referncia ao meu servidor e o nome da base de dados.
Ver: Configurao FreeTDS
5.7 Informando os dados para autenticao do usurio.
5.8 Informando o nome da conexo.
5.9 Testando a conexo.
Conexo Realizada com sucesso.
Sqlite Sqlite
Home >> Connections >> SQLite To connect with SQLite in Scriptcase you should enable PHP modules/extensions php_pdo.dll, php_pdo_sqlite.dll and php_sqlite.dll in php.ini file.
Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX). Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase.
Enabling Php Module Sqlite (windows)

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Windows Edit the PHP.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check the file path according to the image below.
On the PHP.INI file find the DLL's pdo.dll, pdo_sqlite.dll, sqlite.dll and remove the ; (semicolon) to enable the PHP SQLite module. See image below.
Then you must check if the SQLite PDO module was enabled in the info.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase: Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase.
Enabling Php Module Sqlite (linux)

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Linux To enable the module for SQLite, the options --with-pdo[=DIR], --with-sqlite[=DIR] e --withpdo_sqlite[=DIR] should be used when compiling the PHP. For other settings visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.sqlite.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase: Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase.
Sqlite Pdo
Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase.

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right a screen to create connection, click on the image of the SQLite database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS type - Set the DBMS type: SQLite PDO or SQLite. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. PATH - Enter the full path to the file .Db.
If you have problem to connect, check if the SQLite module is enabled in the PHP: Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS). Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX).
Sybase Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase To connect to Sybase database becomes necessary install and configure "Sybase Client". In the links below select the desired option.
Installing and configuring the "Sybase Client." Enabling PHP in Sybase. Creating a connection in Scriptcase.
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Sybase Client Requirements: Must have SyBase client installed on; Enabled extension/module php_sybase_ct.dll of PHP in php.ini file;
How to do step by step:
On WINDOWS, install the SyBase client. We used in this tutorial the version ASE 12.5.1 GA.
SyBase client installation.
Its only necessary to install the modules selected below.
After the installation open the program DSEDIT and create an entry to your server.
Testing your connection with the software SQL Advantage.
Once the "Sybase Client" is installed correctly, we must make sure your DLL is being enabled in PHP: Enabling Sybase in PHP.
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Enabling PHP
After connecting with success, edit the PHP.ini file. Run the PHP info function to check the php.ini file location according to image below.
In the PHP.INI file, look for the php_sybase_ct.dll and remove the ";" to enable the SyBase module in PHP. Remember to restart the web server. See image below.
Creating a connection in Scriptcase
To connect with your SyBase Database in ScriptCase, follow the steps above and when the SyBase module is enabled in ScriptCase Diagnosis (in the main menu of ScriptCase: Help | Diagnosis), proceed to create the connection.
Once the DLL is enabled we can create a connection in Scriptcase: Creating a connection on Scriptcase.
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (SYBASE)
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of the Sybase database.
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Gets the DBMS type. Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Database Name - Enter the Sybase database instance name. Username - Enter a valid database user name. Password - Enter the valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Generic Odbc Generic Odbc

Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC connection via "Generic ODBC" is generally used to create connections to databases dBase (.dbf), Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.. You just need to have the ODBC driver that corresponds to your database available.
This tutorial is only valid for the ScriptCase (server) running on WINDOWS.
See step by step how to create and configure the ODBC related to your database and how to connect with ScriptCase
?? Creating the ODBC dBase (.dbf) ?? Creating ODBC for Progress ?? Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro ?? Connecting to the ODBC Scriptcase.
Dbase(dbf)
Creating the ODBC for dBase (.dbf)

Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> dBase(DBF) See step by step hot to create the ODBC data source: To create a connection using ODBC, we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control Panel. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator, select the tab System DNS (see image below) and create your connection with your DBF file.
If you are using Windows 7 x64, you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32.exe to create the ODBC.
Select the folder and the dbf file, see image below.
Once the ODBC Data Source is created, we can proceed with the connection in Scriptcase: ?? Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase.
Progress
Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Progress Steps to do: Install Merant Progress 92 ODBC. Create a ODBC data Source on the same ScriptCases server.
Installing Progress
1. Enable ODBC (Merant ODBC) option during Progress Installation. 2. Set environment variables: DLC - C:\Program File\Progress (according to final Progress path) PATH - %DLC%\bin PROMSGS - %DLC%\promsgs 3. Create a directory to save your test database, ex.: C:\sports. 4. Open Progress "Data Dictionary" tool and choose "Create a New Database" option. 5. Choose "A Copy of the SPORTS Database" option and enter the full path to the file. Ex: C:\sports\sports.db 6. Edit C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file. 7. Add "sports" services to a free port using "tcp" protocol, ex: 2050 8. Create a load.bat file in c:\sports directory. 9. Put the following data in load.bat file, with the port defined in services file on the -S parameter: @echo off cd \ cd c:\sports _mprosrv sports -n 4 -Ma 1 -Mn 21 -Mpb 10 -N tcp -S 2050 10. Run the load.bat file. 11. Open the Progress "Data Administration". 12. Open the menu "Database :: Connect". 13. On the new window, enter the database full path: C:\sports\sports.db 14. Click in: "Options" and inform the following: Network - TCP Service Name - sports 15. Click in OK and open the menu option "Admin :: Security :: Edit User List". 16. Add user "sysprogress", use "sysprogress" as password for this example. 17. Close the "Data Administration".
Creating a PROGRESS ODBC
1. Access Windows Control Panel to create a new ODBC Source.

If you are using Windows 7 x64, you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32.exe to create the ODBC.
1. Open "System Source" tab and click "Add". 2. Choose "MERANT Progress SQL92" driver. 3. Put a name to your ODBC and set these parameters: Hostname - localhost Port Number - your port defined in "services", ex: 2050 Database Name - sports User ID - sysprogress Password - sysprogress 4. Test and create the connection.
Visual Foxpro
Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Visual FoxPro This tutorial connects the Scriptcase server with Visual FoxPro ODBC. The ODBC Driver is found at : http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/vfoxpro/bb190233.aspx
Native Connection
Step 1: Create a new ODBC in the System DSN.
STEP 2: Select the Visual FoxPro Driver.
Step 3: Enter the ODBC(DSN) name, and enter the database file path.
STEP 4: After complete the ODBC creation verify it.
Generic Odbc Connection In Scriptcase
Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Generic ODBC connection in Scriptcase Requirements: Configure an ODBC to your database. Access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New Connection", click on the image of the Generic ODBC.
Connection Name - Set the name of your new connection. DBMS Type - Defined as ODBC Generic. Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not. ODBC Name - Enter the name of the ODBC. Username - Enter the user name (if exist) to access your database. Password - Enter the password (if exist) to access your database.
Step 4:Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection. If there is any connection failure, check the fields filled in, especially user, password and ODBC name.
If your ODBC is not yet created, see how to create it: Creating the ODBC dBase (.dbf) ?? Creating ODBC for Progress ?? Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro
Working With Applications Overview
Applications
Each page created by Scriptcase is called "Application". The following types of application are available: GRID - Applications used for data visualization and analysis. ScriptCase Grid applications combine search functions and report formatting functions including generating output in PDF, XLS, XML, RTF and other formats. FORM - Applications for data update. ScriptCase creates applications with all resources: records inclusion, update, exclusion and navigation. Scriptcase offers a flexible range of form types to accommodate the business needs. See below the options available . Simple - A record per page Multiple Record - Multiple records per page. Record lines are inserted, updated or deleted at the same time. Editable Grid - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. All record lines are enabled to edit. Editable Grid View - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. The record lines are disabled. To edit a record line, first it must be enabled to edit. CONTROL - Applications to manage the system infra-structure, like capturing data (parameters) that will be passed to other applications. Ex.: system login, company selection, access selection and etc. SEARCH - Filter form to link to any application that needs to receive a string having a WHERE clause. MENU - Applications to create a system hierarchic navigation structure. It is a extremely useful resource, once that it organizes the applications visually, facilitating the user access to the applications. TREE MENU - Applications to create a system TreeView navigation structure (similar to the windows explorer). TABS - ScriptCase combines many developed applications in a structure where each tab corresponds to an application. PDF REPORT - Create PDF files. ScriptCase provides a tool to generate quality reports using predefined formats. Use this application to generate reports for government institutions or other organization that required specific format. CONTAINER - Allows you to display various types of applications nested in Widgets similar to those for iGoogle. BLANK - Allows developers to write PHP / HTML code and display a result of the process. CALENDAR - It allow to generate Calendar applications. Great to build applications with Scheduling and Appointments.
Creating Applications How To Create Applications?
Creating Applications
ScriptCase offers a Standard mode and a Batch mode to create applications. To access the Standard Mode, just click on File >> New Application Menu or on the toolbar button New Application.
Image1: New Application through Menu.
Image2: New Application through Toolbar.
To see more about creating applications, click on the following link: Creating applications
Batch Creation
Scriptcase has an option to Create Multiple Grid and Form Applications at once. (Batch)
Image 3: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Menu.
Image 4: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Toolbar.
See more details about the Batch Express Creation Mode.
Express Mode
The Express mode helps to create applications faster than Wizard Mode. Just trivial data must be informed. All information is in the same screen.
Image1: Express Mode Interface.
The user selects the application type to create on the left side and all necessary settings are displayed on the right .
Connection - It indicates a database to use. The connection must be previously created in the project. Table - It allows to create a SQL Select command based on a table (or view) from the database. It will get all fields from the table. SQL Select Statement (only for Grid and Search applications) - Displays the SQL Select Statement. It can be edited or you can use "SQLBuilder" Tool to build the SQL. Name - Define a name to the Application. Localization - Define the Language and Regional settings used in the Application.
Batch Express Mode
Batch Express mode creates multiple applications (Grids and Forms).
Image1: Batch Express Mode Interface.
First a connection must be selected. Then a list with all tables availabe on that database (connection) is displayed (Image1).
Image2: Selecting Tables.
When a table is selected then ScriptCase displays an option to create Form and Grid based on that table (Image2). Click on "Next" to see a list of Grid and Form applications selected on previous step. Inform the name, a description and the type if it is a Form. (Image3)
Image3: Applications Descriptions Interface.
On the bottom, there is an option to generate the source code and/or to open the applications to be edited after creating them. Then click on "Finish" to create the applications.
Image4: Creating the applications.
After created the applications are listed in the Project Home.(Image5)
Image5: Batch Express Mode Interface.
Editing Applications How To Edit Applications?
Editing Applications
Each application type has a great variety of settings. These settings can be edited by opening the application edit panel. To edit an application you can click on the application name or on the "Edit" option in the Application list panel.
Image1: Editing an application.
An application workspace has 2 panels. The first is the applications settings groups (a tree menu divided in Groups). The second panel opens the settings option selected in the first.
Image2: Editing an application.
1 - Application Settings Groups It groups the access to application settings using Tree Menus inside an Accordion Menu. It helps to subdivide categories of settings.
2 - Application Settings Panel It opens the settings option selected from the Application Settings Groups (Menu on the Left).
Grid Applications Overview

Grid applications
Grid applications are powerful information analysis resource. Grid applications display data retrieved from a database using a SELECT statement. The displayed information is organized in a grid layout. The grid applications generated are complete web reports with the following functionality: Feature Search Description Search form associated to the grid. Use the search page to filter the displayed data Paging Define the number of rows to display per page and page navigation. Data Exporting Generated grids can export data to many formats : RTF, XML, XLS e CSV. Groups In one click is possible to create break down lines and group data by N levels or fields. Totals Summarize columns using different functions such as: SUM , AVG , MAX , MIN. Summary Display a summary page based on groups and totals, displaying only the summary data. Charts Charts based on grids data can be displayed in different styles like: Bars , Columns , Pie , Dots and more Sorting Single sort is automatically created on reports columns header, cascade sort is also available at run time. Fields The end user can select at runtime which columns to selection displays in the grid. Printing Print the generated reports in PDF or HTML. formats. options Links creation Create links to other applications. Events Customize grid events PHP code, used to create calculated programming fields , business rules, etc. Data formatting Format the grid data, field types such as: date , currency , decimal values, integer values, images, text. Automatic data formatting can also be integrated to the regional settings.
Image1: Simple grid application running.
Image2: Grid application using group and total.
Grid Settings
Image1: Grid Settings.
Attributes: Load modules - Loaded interfaces available to end user. Start by Search - Select the grid initialization mode (display the search form before the grid). Search Modal - Display search form as a modal window. Initial Module - Define what module will be opened first. Orientation - Define the grid orientation as: Horizontal
Slide
Vertical
Pagination - Define the pagination as below: Partial - Display in multiple pages (number of records per page is user defined). Total - Display in a unique page (all selected records). Lines per Page - Number of lines per page. Display Line Number - Display the line number in the begin of each line. Display Titles - Display the field title (labels). Columns per Page - Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical or Slide. Enter the record number to display sequentially (side by side) in a page. Vertical Total on Single Line - Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical. Display records sequentially (side by side) in a page. Horizontal Alignment - Application horizontal alignment. Margins - Define the margin of the application (up, down, right and left). Alignment - Slide or vertical grid fields alignment. Table Width - Table width. Use with ?Width Unit?. Ignored for ?Automatic? type. Table Width Unit - Table width measurement unit (Percentage, Pixel or Automatic). Table Columns: Informed - It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization.
Calculated - Calculate size according with the type and the field size. Automatic - The alignment will be a browser criteria. Refresh Interval - Interval in seconds to refresh (reload) the grid records.
Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options: 1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field. 2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application. 3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Defines which fields are displayed in the application.
Figure 1: Select Fields.
Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form).
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously.
Image1: Toolbar.
Attributes: Navigation - Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid. Next Previous First Last Exit Navigation by page Advance to the next page of the grid. Return to the previous page of the grid. Locates in the first page of the grid. Locates in the last page of the grid. Quit the application. Display links to pages. eg: 1 2 3 4 5
Exports - Define the formats that must be generated. The ScriptCase can generate: Print Create the grid in HTML format. PDF Create a complete report, having all grid data in PDF format. WORD Create a complete report, having all grid data in WORD (.doc) format. Excel Create a complete report, having all grid data in Excel format. XML Create a complete report, having all grid data in XML format. RTF Create a complete report, having all grid data in RTF format. CSV Create a complete report, having all grid data in CSV format. Other Jump to Rows limit Define a button that allows to skip ( and position) to a specific record. A button to define a maximum number of line per page.
Search Columns Sorting Order Summary Gantt Languages Themes
When clicked lead to the search form. Selects columns to display (or hide). A button that allows the user to sort the page by multiple criteria ( column ). A option in the toolbar that displays a summary line with result set records info. A button to display the Gantt's chart. A combo box to select the language. A combo box to select the theme (available in the project properties).
Rows Counter Web help A button to display the current page help. Quicksearch Separator Image used to separate the buttons group. Group of Buttons Export Separator Separator Image used to separate the buttons group. Define a button that allows to open a float menu with a group of buttons.
Buttons Settings
Image2: Buttons Settings.
OPTIONS
Image3: Grid Toolbar Options.
Attributes: Display summary - Display summary at the bottom of each page. Format rows counter - Display format of the rows counter. eg.: [1 to 10 of 200]
The amount of links displayed - The amount of page links to display if the option navigation by page is enabled. Lines per page - Amount of record lines per page. Jump to - Jump to page, or record. Rows to choose - Show which options will be displayed for amount of rows in the combobox. eg. 10,20,30
Export
This screen allows to configure the PDF file to generate by the grid to export.
Image1: PDF Settings Interface.
Attributes: PDF Orientation - Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape. PDF Format - Define the PDF form type (letter, A4, etc.). Print type - Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic. Records per page - Applicable only for horizontal lined up grids, define the number of records printed per page. Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per PDF page summary. Complete lines until footer - Fill with lines (empty) until footer. Open PDF directly - Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page. Create Charts - Creates summary charts in PDF. Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application. PDF Resolution - Allows the user toConfigurePDF resolution parameters during the application execution. Fonts Resolution - Text font size when generating PDF files. PDF Width - Resolution simulation of the browser width in pixels for which the PDF will be generated.
Generate Bookmarks - Generates bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks will be generated relative to the breaks. Page numbers format- Define the display format: simple (1,2,3,4,5,...), complete (1/n, 2/n, 3/n,?) or it will not use numeration. Upper Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF upper margin. Bottom Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF bottom margin. Right Margin - PDF right margin in Millimeters. Left Margin - PDF left margin in Millimeters. Allow to print - Allow the user to print PDF. Allows to modify - Allow the user to change the PDF.
Configure the WORD format of the grid.
Image2: WORD Settings Interface.
Attributes Print Type - Character used to separate lines of registers. Rows per page in grid - Define number of rows printed per WORD page. Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per WORD page summary. Open WORD directly - Opens the generated WORD file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Configure the CSV format of the grid.
Image2: CSV Settings Interface.
Attributes Lines separator - Character used to separate lines of registers. Columns separator - Character used to separate the data columns. Text delimiter - Character used as a data delimiter of a column.
Opening CSV Directly - Open the CSV generated file without the displaying an intermediated page link. Add Label - Adds label to he columns.
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XLS directly - Open the generated XLS file without displaying an intermediated page link. Format - File format (XLSX or XLS).
HTML Print
Configure the HTML format of the grid.
Image3: HTML Print Interface.
Attributes: Print Mode - Select what will be printed: Both, Current Page and Complete Report. Print Type - Selecting the print mode (color): Both, Black and White and Colorful. Rows per Page - Define the quantity of rows to display per page. Rows per page in summary - Define the quantity of rows to display per page in PDF summary. Print Background - Show Background printing HTML.
Other Formats
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XML directly - Open the generated XML file without displaying an intermediated page link. Open RTF directly - Open the generated RTF file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Sql
Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.
SQLSelect Statement - Display the SQL select command. Edit the statement to add or delete fields, functions, etc. Tip: Use the SQL Builder for statement fast assembly. SQL Preparation - Enter SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the main select. Connection - Display the (database) connection name used. This connection can be changed for another that has the same tables (SQL). Use Customized Message - Define a customized error message to be displayed when the application has no records.(EOF). ? No Records Message - Message displayed when the application has no records. Field associated to Use Personalized Message. Font Face - Error Message font face. Field associated to Use Personalized Message. Font Size - Error Message font size. Field associated to Use Personalized Message. Font Color - Error Message font color. Field associated to Use Personalized Message.
Variable for Table - Variable name used for replacing the table name. Also inform the part of the table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable.
Note: Fill the first box with the variable name. The second box must be filled with a part of the table name to be substituted.
Fields Variables - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each dynamically determined field, enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.
Note: Fill the first box with variable name, in the second select the name of the field to be substituted.
Case Sensitive - Apply case sensitive.
Sorting
Define sort fields. Grid fields are sorted at running time, just by clicking on the column name (field) to order it. By default breaks are respected in the fields sort. Also by default, the six first fields already come checked (with an asterisk at the field left side).
Image1: Fields with Sort.
Note: Use the function on/off to include or remove a field.
Log
New interface included in the V6. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.
Image 1: Log Interface.
Options: Scheme - Scheme of log to be used for the application. All Fields - Use all fields in the log. Events - Which event the log will save the application changes.
Security
Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected, the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.
Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. See the examples below. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on');
Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid.
In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert the following code:
// two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('form_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('grid_products','on'); sc_apl_status('form_products','on'); } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('form_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('grid_products','off'); sc_apl_status('form_products','off'); } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"); }
Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the login application onValidate event, enter the following code:
URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL, if he does not have access to the application. Use Password: An application password setting is required. (See image below).
At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. If the password is not entered correctly, an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed.
In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes, thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase.
Quick Seach
Quick Search
Quick Search is an option that allow us to make searches in multiple Grid fields through a text input field in the toolbar.
In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options:
Button within the search - Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input object). Quicksearch show combobox - Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option. Quicksearch Watermark - Watermark showed in quicksearch Quicksearch widt - Quicksearch width in pixels.
Then we must select which fields can be searched.
And we can select several search criterias.
Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it.
Fields Overview
In this session just the fields that are part of the grid are displayed, that is, the fields that were selected in the menu GRID - SELECT FIELDS.
A series of attributes are defined to each field. The user can set the attributes specific to a field data type using the update attribute settings page that reloads according to selected type.
Text
Image1: Field General Settings. Attributes: Data type- Define the application field type. Text fields accepts all characters. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: HTML Content - Define the field as HTML. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by ScriptCase. Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Without repeating value
SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Grid Lookup
Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example, a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Grid Lookup - Automatic

Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically, retrieving the values from a database table.
Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes : SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value. Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.
Grid Lookup - Manual

Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.
Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.
Attributes : Lookup Types - Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value , Multiple Values (Delimiter), Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).
Single Value
Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.
Figure1.1: Single Value lookup settings.
Label - Text displayed in the grid. Value - Attribute stored in the table. For example, M is displayed Male.
Multiple Values (Delimiter)
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. For
example, the stored value S;M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.
Figure1.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).
Label - Text displayed in the grid. Value - Attribute stored in the table. Delimiter - Define the character used to separated string values.
Multiple Values (Position)
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .
Figure1.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).
Label - Text displayed in the grid. Value - Attribute stored in the table. Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1).
Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
Multiple Values (Binary)
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
Figure1.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).
Label - Text displayed in the grid.
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size. Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title. Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title. Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Display an icon at the Field Title line enabling Chart display .
Figure6: Column Chart.
Attributes: Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart. Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg. Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color. Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces. Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
Multiple Lines Text
Figure1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. Multiple line text fields display line breaks (like HTML tag ). Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: HTML Content - Define the field as HTML. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by ScriptCase. Width - Field width. Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value. Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.

Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. For example, the stored value S;M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.
Value - Attribute stored in the table. Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1). Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Column Chart
Integer
Figure1: Field General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Integer fields are formatted according to integer formatting rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Figure2: Values Format Interface.
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If No is selected the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative format of number are displayed.(See regional settings). Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Negative Sign- Define the character used to display negative values. Number negative format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Negative Color - Define a different font color to negative values.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The
statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary

Single Value
Label - Text displayed in the grid. Value - Attribute stored in the table. Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1). Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books - Traveling) Attributed Lookup
Value 1 2 4 8 16
Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart. Attributes: Line Chart Type - There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. The chart width defines the images size to be displayed.
Note: Chart width 200px. Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column. The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered.
Note: Icon Quantity is 1000, thus, the amount of stars beside, is display value divided by 1000.
Display value - Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). Quantity Icon - Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. Chart Width - Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Default value is 200px. Chart Height- Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Margin - Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Image / Positive Color - Enter color to be used.
Image / Negative Color - The same as Image / Positive Color above. This parameter is used if the field value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes: Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart. Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg. Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color.
Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces. Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
Decimal
Figure1:
General SettingsInterface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Decimal fields are formatted according to real numbers formatting rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Image: Values Format Interface.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as decimal separator. Negative Signal- Define the character used to display negative values. Number negative format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Negative Color - Define a different color to negative values. Decimal Precision - Value decimal precision. Complete with Zeros - Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right. Example: The value is $125.50 with decimal precision of 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Value M Start 1 Size 1
Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling
F C S SP MO BO TR
1 2 2 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books
8 16
Traveling Music
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Line Chart
Display value - Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). Quantity Icon - Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field.
Chart Width - Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Default value is 200px. Chart Height- Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Margin - Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Image / Positive Color - Enter color to be used. Image / Negative Color - The same as Image / Positive Color above. This parameter is used if the field value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes: Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart. Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg.
Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color. Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces. Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
Currency
Figure 1: Interface General Settings
Attributes: Data type -Define the type of field application. Currency fields are formatted according to currency formatting rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Image: Values Format Interface.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign, Currency positive format and Currency negative format are displayed.(See regional settings). Monetary Format - Define if the field is displayed in monetary format. Monetary Symbol - Define the character used as the monetary symbol. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used to display negative values. Currency positive format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Currency negative format - Define the character used to display negative values. Negative Color - Define a different color to negative values. Decimal Precision - Value decimal precision. Complete with Zeros -Define the decimal precision is to be completed with zeros to the right. Example: The value is $125.50 with decimal precision 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and
size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Line Chart
Display value - Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). Quantity Icon - Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. Chart Width - Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Default value is 200px. Chart Height- Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Margin - Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Image / Positive Color - Enter color to be used. Image / Negative Color - The same as Image / Positive Color above. This parameter is used if the field value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes: Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart.
Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg. Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color. Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces. Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
Html Image
Figure1: Field General Settings.
Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type. Html image fields are used to display images. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. - Define the image to display. The icon "Choose image" displays Scriptcase standard images. Alternatively click in "Upload image" to send an image from a different location to the server (images need to be in the same server to be displayed). Border - Image border width in pixels. Width - Define image width in Pixels. Height - Define image height in Pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Date
Image1:
General Settings Interface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Image2: Values Format with regional settings.
Image3: Values Format without regional settings.
Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings date formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings). Display - Show a list of predefined date display formats.
Detail Mask - Define the grid display format to the field, according to the PHP Date function.
Examples: d-m-Y F/Y j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A
25-09-2009 September/2009 25/9/2001 14:30:11 PM l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, January 25 2009 h:i:s 11:33:20 #h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the
positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value. Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by.
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.

Single Value
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item.
Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes:
Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size. Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title. Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title. Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Attributes:
Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart. Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg. Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color. Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces. Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
Time
Image1:
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type.Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).
Display - Show a list of predefined date display formats. Detail Mask - Define the grid display format to the field, according to the PHP Date function.
Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value. Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.

Single Value
Label - Text displayed in the grid. Value - Attribute stored in the table. Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1).
Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Date And Time
Image1: General Settings Interface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date and time rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date and time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display. To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings). Display - Show a list of predefined date display formats. Decimal of seconds - Number os decimals for seconds. Detail Mask - Define the grid display format to the field, according to the PHP Date function.
Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Value - Attribute stored in the table. Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1). Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Column Chart
Image(database)
Image (database)
Image1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the images are retrieved from the database in binary. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Image Border Image Height Image border
width in pixels.
- Define image height (in Percent or Pixels).
Image Width - Define image width (in Percent or Pixels). Maintain Aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Open in Another Window - Open another window and displays original image. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Image (file Name)
Image1:General SettingsInterface
Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type. The images are saved in a sever directory and the file name in a table field in the database. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Image Border Image Height Image border
width in pixels.
- Define image height (in Percent or Pixels).
Image Width - Define image width (in Percent or Pixels). Maintain Aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Open in Another Window - Open another window and displays original image. Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files (it is added under the directory defined in Images Directory. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables, in the subdirectory name. Image Cache - Time in minutes to keep the image in cache memory. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Document (database)
Image1:
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the files are retrieved from the database in binary. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. File name - Define the field to store the document file name (it is database field). SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Document (file Name)
Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. The file is saved in a server directory and the file name in a table text field. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files. Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size.
Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title. Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title. Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Credit Card Number
Attributes: Data type - Credit Card Number fields are formatted according to specific rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Attributes :
Lookup Types - Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value , Multiple Values (Delimiter), Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).
Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list:
Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling
Value M F C S SP MO BO TR
Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3
Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value Lookup Description
1 2 4 8 16
Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select
Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size. Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title. Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title.
Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Attributes: Column for Label - Column Label. Background Color - Background color (Select from color palette). Display Values - Display Chart Values. Maintain Aspect - Maintain Chart aspect. Do not resize the chart. Text Angle - Column Title position angle. Chart width - Chart width, in pixels. Chart height - Chart height, in pixels. Margin - Chart Margin size. Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg. Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters. Margins Color- Chart margins color. Labels Color - Chart Labels color. Values Color - Chart Values color. Fill Spaces - Fills blank spaces.
Display Marks - Display chart marks. Marks Type - Marks Type.
E-mail
Image1:
Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type.Email fields are formatted according to specific email rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Attributes :
Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in
bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Lookup
Value 1 2 4 8 16
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size. Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title. Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Url
Image1: General SettingsInterface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type.URL fields are formatted according to specific URL rules. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Other Page - Open the link in another page. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby
(two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling)
Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16
Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style - Field font type. Font Size - Font size. Italic Text - Uses Italic font. Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field. Number of characters - Characters limit in the field. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment. Background Image - Uses a background image in the field. Line Break - Uses line break in the field. Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette). Background color - Background color (Select from color palette). Width - Field width. Height (px) - Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title. Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes: Data Type - Field data type. Label - Field title. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Barcode
Attributes: Type - Type of barcode. Text - Text to designate the barcode. There are 18 types of barcode, which are listed below:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Defines the CSS values for fields individually.
Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.
Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.
Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.
Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.
Text - Display the specified help text beside the field.
Youtube
General settings
Attributes Data Type - Application field type. Label - Field label in the application. Display Mode - The way the video is displayed, modal or new window. Width - Video width in pixels. Height - Video height in pixels. Link Type - Type of the link: button or text. Link Text - Text of the link. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Database Field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.
Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.
Google Maps
This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API.
Data Type: - Select Google maps as the data type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and is displayed as Client Name. Home - Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API. Display Mode - Defines how the map will be opened. It can either be opened in Modal window or in a New window. Width - Defines the width of the map. Height - Defines the height of the map. Zoom - Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map. API Key- You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API. Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text), which is nothing more than the license to use this service. When you register to use the service, the key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server. All pages (ScriptCase applications) that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering for the Google Maps API. If you have a web server on your machine, you can just get a key for local testing, and that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration. To get your API Key just visit the following site: http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html Link Type - Define the link type. This can be a text link or a button link. Text Link - Specify the text for the link to the map.
Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Displays the SQL (database) field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Qr Code
General Settings
Values Format
Atributtes: Level of error correction - Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed?Solomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less storage capacity. Image Size - Size of the QR code. Margin - Margin of the QR code image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Gantt
The Gantt chart is used to illustrate the progress of the different stages of a project.
Gantt Chart options: Output Format - Output format of the Gantt chart. Field label - Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart. Start Date - Field containing the start date of the registration in the Gantt chart. End Date - Field containing the end date of registration in the Gantt chart. Percent Completed - Field containing information regarding the percent completed of the task in the Gantt chart Resource - Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task in the Gantt chart.
Layout Layout
Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes, organizing fields in blocks, and defining header formats, amongst other options.
Blocks
Conceptually a block is a container in which a Form Application, Control or Grid fields are located. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block, bearing the same name as the application. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column, used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks).
Figure 1: Block settings interface.
To the left of each block there are two icons:

Organising Blocks and Changing position
to edit the block properties; and
to delete the block.
See below how to modify the page block display order.
Click to select the block in order to modify its position.
This is how to remove a block from being displayed. Click on the block and drag it to Blocks not shown. To change the page block is displayed in, all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below.
Attributes: Block (name) - Block title header displayed. Title (Display) - Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed. Label (Display) - Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block. Label (Position) - The label options are: Above - Displays the label above the field.
"Beside" - Displays the label beside the field.
Fields (Columns) - Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. Fields (Position) - Position of fields within the block: Below - The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.
"Beside" - The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.
"Line" - The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns).
Organization (Next) - Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" - Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.
"Beside" - Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one.
"Tabs" - Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab.
Organization (Width) - Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent. Organization (Height)- Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent.
Add New Block

To add new blocks to an application, just click .
Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Attributes: Name - Block name.
Label - Block label.
Edit Block
Click to edit the block properties and click Save.
Figure 2: Edit Block interface. Attributes: Name - Block name. Title - Block Title. Display Title - Whether to display a line containing the block title. Title Font - Block title font applied. Font size - Block title font size applied. Font color - Block title font color. Background color - Block title line background color.
Background image - Block title background image. Title Height - Block title line height (in pixels). Horizontal Alignment - Block title horizontal alignment (Left, Center or Right). Vertical Alignment - Block title vertical alignment (Top, Middle or Bottom). Display Label - Display block field labels. Columns - Number of block field columns. Column Width - Calculate the block columns. Label color - Field label display color. Field Organization - Block field organization. Label Position - Field label position. Next Block - Position of the next block in relation to the current one. Border color - Block border color. Border width - Block border width. Block width - Block width. Block height - Block height. Cellspacing - Spacing between the block cells.
Settings
Figure 1: Layout Settings interface
Is used to define the Application Theme. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template - Used to select the Header format. Footer Template - Used to select the Footer format. Theme - Used to select an existing Theme (colors, fonts, etc) for the application.
Header
Figure 1: Header Interface.
This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Display Header - This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title - Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode, and another one for Update mode). Header Variables - The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (Select query) are displayed beside the header variable when the Field type is selected. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Title: Displays the value entered in Select Title in the header . Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. To see all the available date formats, click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one, click on the Choose an image icon and to upload new images to the server click on the Upload an Image icon . Value: When the Value type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Enter text and/or Global Variables. For example: Employee name: [v_name]. Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications)
FOOTER
Figure 2: Footer Interface.
This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". Display Footer - This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Footer Variables - The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the Select (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the Field type is selected. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in Select Title. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. to see all the available date formats, click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one, click on the Choose an image icon and to upload new images to the server click on the Upload an Image icon . Value: When the Value type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Enter text and/or Global Variables. For example: Employee name: [v_name]. Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications)
Events Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application. OnInit- This event is executed just one time, before the main select of the application execution. In this scope, normally, are executed the macros that update the select, as these: sc_select_field, sc_select_order,sc_select_where(add) and etc. onRecord- This event is executed before displaying each grid record. onHeader- This event is executed immediately before displaying the grid header. Use this event to print some calculated value in the header for example. onFooter-Used to display some calculated value. Write in this event the necessary calculation to display the result in the footer. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Buttons Buttons
There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar.
Figure 1: Create new button.
New Button
To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Buttons Types : (Javascript, PHP, Link).
Image2: Edit button function.
Deleting a button
To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.
Javascript Button
Creating a Javascript Type Button

To create a new button, click on "New button", enter the name and select the type of button.
There are three types of display buttons: (Button, Image and Link).
Button Display Mode
Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title to be displayed in the application.
Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor.
Figure 1: Buttons Settings Interface.
Image Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Icon - Button display icon. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank.
Link Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor.
Deleting a button
Php Button
Creating a Php Type Button

Button Display Mode
Link Button
Creating a Link type button

Button Display Mode
The link button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links. Follow the steps below to create the link required and configure the new Link button to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

1 - Using the link option click in new link, as in the image below.
Image2:Create new Link.
2 - Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).
Image3: Link Type Interface.
3 - Select the application that will be called and click in Next.
Image4: List of Applications Interface.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Variable, Value or Empty. Field - Enter the field used to pass the content. Image5: Parameters Definition Interface - Field. Variable - Enter a global variable existing in the application. Image5: Parameters Definition Interface - Field. Fixed - Enter a fixed content to be passed. Image6: Parameters Definition Interface - Value. Empty - No value will be pass. Image7: Parameters Definition Interface - Empty.
5 - Define the form link properties - Iframe display.
Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How the link is displayed Open in the same window- Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going to the form. Open in other window- Open another window to show the form. Open in a Iframe- Show the form in the same window that the search. Below the search an Iframe is created to display the form. Exit URL for the target application - Web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field. Form Properties - Select the buttons displayed. There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar.
Run Button
Creating a run type button

This new option in the Grid allows to create a button to process a PHP code for selected records (checkbox).
Image1: Button Configuration Interface.
Edit Button: Display Mode (Button)
Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Button). Label - Button Title in the application. Hint - Hint message. Confirmation Message - To not display the message, leave the field empty. Css Style - CSS style class name, created in the schema editor buttons. (Layout buttons)
Edit Button: Display Mode (Image)
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link). Icon - Button display icon. Hint - Hint message. Confirmation Message - To not display the message, leave the field empty.
Edit Button: Display Mode (Link)
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link). Label - Button Title in the application. Hint - Hint message. Confirmation Message - To not display the message, leave the field empty. Css Style - CSS style class name, created in the schema editor buttons. (Layout buttons)
This button Type Uses 2 events to process PHP Codes.

OnRecord: Executed on each selected record.
Image2: PHP Code Interface.
OnFinish: Executed after process all selected records.
Image3:PHP Code Interface
Detail About
The detail is an interesting grid feature. It allows to organize the information displayed according to its importance. Display more important information in the grid and complementary data in detail form. Click on displayed at each grid line to enable the feature.
To enable the details, go to the Grid Settings, as shown below, and enable the checkbox:
Detail Settings
Select the fields to display in detail page.
Image1:Detail Settings.
Attributes Choose the fields to display in detail page - Click field and click in On/Off to select (or unselect) fields. Display Detail - Define display detail according to following options: Beside the Grid - Display detail at the right side of the record, in the same window that displays the grid. Below the Grid - Display selected record detail, below the record at same window (use the detail button to select the record detail). In another page - Display just the detail for the selected record hiding the grid. In another window - Display detail in popup window. Alignment - Define detail alignment configuration of each field (left, right, center). Detail's page width - Define the grid detail page HTML width. Measure unit of the detail - Define grid detail page HTML width unit as percent or pixel.
Detail Keys
Define the fields that will be a part of the where clause to search selected record.
Image2: Detail Keys.
Choose detail field keys to display - Configure the fields to be passed by the WHERE clause: Turn On/Off - Select field to display in the detail. An asterisk is displayed by the selected field . All - Select all fields. None - Uncheck all fields.
Header
FOOTER
Group By Group By Settings
Define the Grid break criteria, which fields that will be break objects and in what field sequence the break should occur.
Image1: Group by Interface.
Attributes: Enable Treeview - Turn on/off the group by. Group By Line - Select the breaking position: Before and after the records. Before the registers - Will occurs the breaking before showing the relative registers to it.
After registers - Will occur the breaking after showing the relative registers to it.
Group By Header - Display break header in all pages. Keep Group By Order - Order the fields in group. Display Titles - Display fields label on the breaking line. Record Count - Define a column title for the amount of registers. Value Separator - Define a separator between the title and the value of a field in the breaking.
Select Fields
Image1: Interface of breaking fields.
Choose the fields which will be a part of the break: Button On/Off - Mark/Unmark the chosen field to the break. The chosen field is identified with an asterisk in the left side of its name. Button All - Mark all fields. These fields show an asterisk in the left side of its name. Button None - Unmark all fields. It is used when the user want to restart the field selection.
Events
OnGroupBy - This event is always performed when breakings occurs, independently of the level, and allow the manipulation of the totalization fields. The ScriptCase have all totalization variables of the grid scope. Guessing that an application which have two levels of breakings (state and city) and which totalize two fields (parcel and balance), we can have access to the totals, in the scope of calculate for each register, in the following way: {count_ger} {sum_parcel} {sum_balance} {count_state} - contains the total amount of the registers; - contains the total sum of the field parcel; - contains the total sum of the field balance; - contains the total amout of the registers of the breaking of state which has been processed; - contains the total sum of the field parcel of the field of state which has bem processed;
{sum_state_parcel}
{sum_state_balance} - contains the total sum of the field balance of the field of state which has bem processed; {count_city} - contains the total amout of registers of the breaking of city which has been processed; - contains the total sum of the field parcel of the breaking of city which has been processed; - contains the total sum of the field balance of the breaking of city which has been processed;
{sum_city_parcel}
{sum_city_balance}
Considering that the formulas defined to be processed in the scope of calculate during the breakings will be acting for the some levels of breaking, the special variables of totalization, in this scope, they are mentioned substituting the breaking name by the key word breaking that means: {count_ger} {sum_parcel} {sum_balance} - contains the total amout of registers; - contains the total sum of the field parcel; - contains the total sum of the field balance; - contains the total amount of registers, of the breaking which has been processed; - contains the total sum of the field parcel of the breaking which has been processed;
{count_breaking}
{sum_breaking_parcel}
{sum_breaking_balance} - contains the total sum of the field balance of the breaking which has been
processed; Ex: In an application which has breakings by state and city and which totalizes a field balance in the breakings total, we wish to show the average in substitution to the balance. It creates a method in the event OnGroupBy with the following content: {sum_breaking_balance}= {sum_breaking_balance} / {count_breaking};
Fields
Data Type - Define the application field type. Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx - xxxx (xx) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx (zz) xxxx - xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 - 7890 (00) 1234 - 5678 (12) 3456 - 7890 ( ) 1234 - 5678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling
16
Music
Group By Settings
Image1: Group By Fields Interface.
Attributes: Fields Position - Define the group by fields display organization. Columns - Define how many columns are used to display the break down info. Display Label- Display the field label on break down. Line break - Display break down line. Summary line (grid) - Display summary line in the grid. Total line (summary) - Display line total in the summary. Total line message - Define the text message displayed in the total line. Ex.: Orders total in the state. Records amount - Display the amount of records displayed in the break down. PDF Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate PDF page. Ex.: Display each state orders in a different report page.
PDF Summary break page - Display each summary break in a separate PDF page. HTML Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate HTML page. HTML Summary break pages - Display each summary break in a separate HTML page. Start TreeView - TreeView initial state. Sorting - Order in which the field will appear in the Group By. Fields - Select the fields (VALUE and SUM) displayed in the group by line.
Group by line layout (Label)
Image2:Group by line layout (Label) Interface.
Attributes: Text Font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Font Size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. Text Color - Label color on the breaking. Background Color - Breaking background color. Bold Text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Group by line layout (Value)
Image3: Group by line layout(Value) Interface.
Attributes: Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. Text color - Label color on the breaking. Bold text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Configure the total line layout
Image4: Configure the total line layout Interface.
Attributes: Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. Text color - Label color on the breaking. Background color - Breaking background color. Bold text -Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Totals Settings
Use this option to define fields with totals (on breaks or at the end).
Image1: Summarization Functions Interface.
Attributes: Results in a single line - Display the title General Total and the total values in a single line. "Yes"
"No"
Display Total - Define pages to display the General Total. Choose from : "Display in all pages ", " Display in last page" or "Do not display". Group SubTotal - It respects as the way will be visualized the totals of the breaking: Yes - Show sub-totals of the breaking after it occurs. No - Show sub-totals of the breaking in the beginning before it occurs. Record Count - Display the record count beside the General Total. "Yes"
"No"
This interface defines the "Group By" field labels:
Image2: Layout Settings Interface.
Attributes: Group By field - Group By Selected fields. Label - Label Description displayed in the end application.
Display - Allows to display or hide the record count.
Select Fields
Image1: Summarization fields Interface.
Select the fields to be summarized. The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be totalized. To attribute an operation to be used in a column (field), just select the field and check the operation button. Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated. Average - Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field. Maximun - Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field. Minimun - Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.
Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.
Posicionamento Overview
The positioning of the summary fields can be Default, Grouped or By field:
Default Grouped By field
Default
Default option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized.
Image1:Summary Fields Order Interface (Default).
The Total line is displayed in Credit Lmit column. See below:
Image2: Default Order generated.
Aligment
Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label It allows to define what message will be displayed instead of Total:
Image3: Label Settings Interface.
Grouped
Grouped option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized. But in different lines to each summarization type (Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image1: Summary fields Order Interface (Grouped).
It is possible to change the summary positions clicking and dragging to up or down.
Image2: Changing the line positions.
This example , the Total displays the sum and average of Credit Limit :
Image3: Grouped Order.
Aligment
Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Image4: Edting labels.
By Field
By Field option organizes each summarized field by field name. It doesn't follow the columns layout.
Image1: Summary Fields Order Interface (By Field).
Break Line per Field

Enabling "break line per field" checkbox, it will display an unique field per line with selected summarizations (Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image2: "Break line per Field" enabled.
Disabling "break line per field" checkbox it displays each field side by side.
Image3: "Break line per Field" disabled.
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Figura4: Edio dos Labels.
Fields
Total Label Settings
Figura1: Total Label Settings Interface
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field. Font size - Allow to define the font size. Text color - Allow to define the text color. Background color - Allow to define the background color. Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Total Line (Data) Display Settings
Figura2: Total Line Display Settings Interface.
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field. Font size - Allow to define the font size. Text color - Allow to define the text color. Background color - Allow to define the background color. Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Summary Summary Settings
Image1: Summary Settings Interface.
Attributes: Title - Defines a title for the summary, if not informed, Scriptcase uses the default title for the summary : "Summary ", but if you want no title to be displayed enter on the title a HTML tag " " as below.
Image2: Title Field informed with the HTML Tag.
Quantity title - Records count title. Summary Display: On every page - In the end of each search result page the summary is displayed below the grid. On the last page - In the end of the last search result page (and only in this page) the summary is displayed below the grid. On another page - The summary is displayed in a separated page that is opened with a button the toolbar is clicked (the summary button). Record Count: Do not show - Do not show the total of records per breaking. Show just in he summary - Show in the summary the total of records per breaking. Show in the summary and in the Chart - Show in the summary the total of records per breaking and show chart. Horizontal total - Display horizontal total on summaries. Vertical total - Display vertical total on summaries. The chart icon positioning - Chart icon positioning. Positioning of the Total icon - Positioning of the Total icon. Page width - Page width value for the summary.
Width unit - Measure unit used in the widths (Automatic, Pixels and Percent).
layout settings
Attributes:
GroupBy field - Selected break fields. Position - Sets position on the x-axis or y-axis. Sorting - Sets the sorting by the database value or the display value. Fill empty labels - Defines whether the labels will be filled. Link Grid - Creates a link in the selected field. Alignment - Defines the layout alignment :centered, left or right. Tabular format - Sets he tabular format for the summary.
Toolbar
In this screen we can do the referring configurations to the summary. The summary always occurs when the application of search have to show the summary, summary type, summary position, summary ordinance, hot key, amount of registers, graph type, Chart width, Chart height, Chart edge, Chart aspect, Chart in other window, summary width and width unit of the summary.
Image1: Interface of Summary Configuration.
Attributes: Formats - Allow to select the formats of summary generation. Buttons - Allow to select the buttons which are shown in the toolbar. Buttons Order - Allow to order the buttons in the toolbar as necessary, using the selection bar (right side of the table).
Chart Settings
Here we can configure chart settings. The settings are used when the application displays summary, chart type, chart width, chart height , etc.
Image1: Generate Column Chart Interface .
Image2: Generate Lines Chart Interface (Total).
Chart Type Image:
Image3: Chart Stettings Interface (Image).
Attributes: Charts Type - Choose between a still image (picture) or flash. Chart Type - Define "Default" chart type displayed if the option Configurable chart is active or chart type be displayed if the option is disabled. Bar:
Line:
Pie:
Rent:
3D Pie:
Pulse:
Disperse:
Create Graphic - Method of generation of graphics. Background Color - Generated chart background color. DisplaysValues - Displays values on generated chart . Values Display Angle - Angle to diplay generated chart values. Chart width - Generated chart width in pixels. Chart Height -Generated chart height in pixels. Values sorting - Sort chart values. Chart margin -Generated chart margin in pixels. Legend height - Maximum height, in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Mantain Aspect - Mantain chart aspec when resizing the image. Chart display mode - Display charts in another window. Number of columns - Chart quantity per line. (Only for displaying on the same page). Margin - Margin between the charts. (Only for displaying on the same page). Margins Color - Generated chart margins color. Labels Color - Generated chart labels color. Values color - Generated chart values color. Fill space - Fill in the blanks. Displays marks - Displays the generated chart marks . Marks symbol - Type of marks.
Chart Type Flash:
Chart Type - Define "Default" chart type displayed if the option Configurable chart is active or chart type be displayed if the option is disabled. Bar:
Pie:
Line:
Area:
Bookmark:
Create Graphic - Method of generation of graphics. Chart width - Generated chart width in pixels Chart Height -Generated chart height in pixels. Values sorting - Sort chart values. Chart margin -Generated chart margin in pixels. Legend height - Maximum height, in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Chart display mode - Display charts in another window. Number of columns - Chart quantity per line. (Only for displaying on the same page). Margin - Margin between the charts. (Only for displaying on the same page). Horizontal Alignment - Chart horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment . - Chart Vertical alignment. Display before the summary - Displays the chart before the summary. Bar - Oriention - Bars orientation - vertical or horizontal on the chart. Bar - Shape - Bars shape (bar, cylinder cone or pyramid) on the chart. Bar - Dimension - Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart. Bar - Overlap - Overlaps bars in the bar chart. on the chart. Bar - Stack - Stacks the bars in a single bar (By series ). Bar - Inversion - Displays the bar from right to left, for example, horizontal bar charts. Bar - Series Group- Group series in bar charts Pie - Format - Forms pie or donut formats. Pie - Dimension - Image dimension on the pie chart. Pie- Sorting - Sort the pie chart. Pie - Explosion - Explode (separate) regions in the pie chart.
Pie - Values format - Format which the data will be displayed. Line - Shape - Displays the format of the line. Line - Inversion - Displays lines in inverted orientation. Line - Series Group sets - Line grouping type. Area - Shape - Area shape displayed in the chart. Area - Stack - Stacks areas in the chart. Area - Inversion - Reverse the display direction of the chart regions. Area - Series group - How to group series in the chart. Bookmark - Inversion - Displays the bookmarks in the reverse/inversa direction. Bookmark - Series Group- Type of group - Type grouping of bookmarks.
Nested Grids What Is Nested Grids?
Nested grids are used to display information in reports hierarchically. For example the orders grid are nested to the customers grid. It is possible create as many nested grids as necessary. On the picture bellow, for each customer a nested grid containing that customer's orders is displayed.
Image1: Nested orders grid.
Read more: How to use nested grids.
Nested Grid- Settings
Nested Grid Settings

On the Settings menu it is possible to edit nested grids general attributes of the
Image1: Nested grids menu.
Image2: Nested grids settings page.
Attributes: Title in the same line- This attribute lets you configure the way you view the subquery. If the title is displayed on the same line, the table of the subquery will be incorporated into the main query.
PDF - This option allows to enable / disable the nested grids exporting to the pdf report, when disabling this option only the "main grid" will be exported. Enable Treeview - This option will force all the nested grids to be displayed using a "+" button on the "main record". Watch it at the picture bellow. Position - This parameter defines where the nested grids will be displayed in reference to the main grid: Option In one column Description Display the nested grid in a new column after the last one.
Bellow the record Displays the nested grid below the main grids rows
Alignment - Allows to set up the nested grid horizontal alignment relative to the main grid. This option only works when using the Position option Bellow the record.. Select between left, right and center.
Define Individually
Any attribute that uses the option Define individually forces this attribute to be configured in each one of the links. (see Editing nested grids ).
New Nested Grid
To create a new nested grid link click on the New Link item as displayed on the picture bellow.
Image1: Create a new link.
Define name and label to new nested grid.
Image2: Name and label for the new "link".
Applications list
All the projects grids which uses or references global variables on SQL statement are displayed. See picture4.
Image3: Target application selection.
IMPORTANT: To use a grid as a nested grid is required that the nested application uses at least one parameter or global variable in its SQL statement as on the picture bellow.
Image4: An order details grid, its SQL statement uses a parameter.
Parameters Settings
Define the parameter(s) that are passed between application.
Image5: Parameter var_cliente linkage.
On the picture above on the left side are displayed the nested grid inbound parameters (global variables). Select one option and value to each variable located on the target application (on the right side of the above image): Field - Used to pass a field's value from the master grid. Fixed - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Empty - Nothing is passed as parameter.
Button Save - Saves all the link parameters and closes the "link wizard".
Editing Nested Grids
Find all the nested grids of your grid in the Links folder located in the Nested Grids Application menu.
General settings
Image2: Nested grid general settings.
It is possible to edit the following attributes: Label - Nested grid title. Link - Define target application and the passed parameters info. Display - Display or hide nested grid following items:
1 - Header 2 - Sequential 3 - Total
Visualization - Nested grid theme is equal to grids theme.
Define Individually
If any nested grid settings is defined individually, as on picture4. define each nested grid parameters on
the nested grids edit screen.
Image3: Nested grids settings defined individually.
All the options defined individually are displayed on the linking edit interface.
Image4: Nested grids update.
Read more about the attributes "Title in the same line", "Position", "Enable treeview" and PDF at: Nested grids settings
Display settings
This options is displayed only if the info bellow is true. Attribute Title in the same line Enable treeview Position Value No No In one column
HorizontalAlignment - Define nested grid horizontal alignment: Left, Right or Center. Vertical Alignment - Define nested grid vertical alignment: Top, Middle or Bottom. Background color - Define nested grid background. Empty forces the use of the default application color. Title horizontal alignment - Defines nested grid title line horizontal alignment. Title vertical alignment - Defines nested grid title line vertical alignment. Bold - Define the nested grid label in bold.
Sorting Rules Sorting Rules Settings
Image1: Sorting rules settings interface.
Attributes: Order of the rule order - Allow to update the sorting rule display order. When you configure this option, will be shown an icon (config sort) which when it is clicked, it allow the choice of the field and its display order ascendant (ASC) or descendant (DESC). Integrate and Sort - Allow to choose the sort type, The options are: fields/rules sort - allow to apply the rules which were created and the field order (ascendant or descendant), fields sort - Allow to apply the the fields sort (ascendant or descendant) or sorting rules - allow to apply the sort according to the rules that were created.
New Rule
New Sorting Rule
Image1: Sorting Rule Interface.
Attributes: Name - Field to inform the rule name. Label- Field to inform the name that will be shown in the application.
Sorting Rule Settings
Image2: Sorting Rule Settings Interface.
Attributes: Label - Allow to inform a name which will be shown when the application is executed. Select the sorting rules fields - Allow to select through the selection bar what fields will be shown (fields which are found in the right side box) and the fields which are not shown (fields which are found in the left side box). To order the fields in the wanted way , use the ordinance bar located at the right side of the box. To apply the ordinance type to the field, you only have to select the field of the box at the right side and select the ascendant mode, where will show beside the field a + or if the ordinance is descendant.
Search Settings
The search settings allows to define all Search application atributes.
Image1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes Ajax - Use Ajax technology on Search form. EmptySearch - Display all records (for empty fields). Search Criteria - Select the SQL "AND" or"OR" commands to define the search criteria. Horizontal Alignment- Allows to define the search form horizontal aligment vertical Alignment - >Allows to define the search form vertical aligment Margins - Define the search form position (margins). Display Condition - Display search condition to user selection. Keep Values - Keep last form values and display it upon return. Preserver fields and orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form. Table width - Search form HTML width value. Table width Unit - Unit used in width measurement. Use Iframe - When activated, displays the search form and the search results in the same browser window, in two FRAMES, one above the other. Initial State - When activated displays the search form first with the grid in the iframe positioned below the search form, when deactivated, displays just the search form. This option is associated to Using Iframe. Iframe Height - Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search form is displayed.
This option is associated to Using Iframe. Use Enter to tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Search Criteria
Image1: Search Criteria Interface.
Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the filter options. To select options click on one option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on "Turn On / Off" button. Buttons: Turn On/Off - Enable or Disable the field or selected option. All - Mark all fields or options. None - Unmark all fields or options. Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows do not display the criteria beside the field.
Toolbar
The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be in both parts simultaneously.
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes: Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the search form toolbars and the buttons position. Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons settings
Image2: Settings Buttons.
Attributes: Button - Button name. Label - Define the label displayed on the button. Hint - Define a hint in the button. Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Layout Layout
OverView
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Display Settings
Layout Settings
Header And Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application. onInit - This event is executed an unique time, before execute the application SQL Select Statement. In this scope, normally are executed macros that modify the SELECT command. For example: sc_select_field, sc_select_order, sc_select_where(add) and etc. onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded. onValidate - Is executed before submit the form.. onSave - Runs when the application is saved. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Fields Overview
This session displays to edit just the fields that are in the search. (Fields selected in GRID->SEARCH>FIELDS.
Image1: Search Fields Interface.
New Field
It allows to add a new field in the application.
1- When click on a new button it is shown the image below, where we determine the amount of fields that will be added.
Image1: Amount of fields Interface.
2- After we determine the amount of fields that will be added, it is necessary to define the settings of the new field (data type, name and label).
Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field.
Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type.
Text
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
Image1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes: Case Settings - Converts the field letters.
Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.
AJAX PROCESSING
Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title
using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
Help Settings
Integer
Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.
VALUES FORMAT
Regional Settings - Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). Separator - Group Separator. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width.
Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Currency
Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field.
Separator - Group Separator. Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Decimal
Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field. Separator - Group Separator. Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field.
Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date
Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid -This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
VALUES FORMAT
Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Selects the display format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select
common time periods to search.
Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition.
All period - Search entire period. Today - Search today. Yesterday - Search yesterday. Last 7 days - Search last 7 days. Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007). Last week(sun-sat) - Search last week. (Sun-Saturday). Last week business days (mon-fri) - Search last week business days.(Mon-Fri). This month -Search from beginning current month until current day. Last month - Search last month.
Note: Special condition filter form interface .
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Time
Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Sets the field label in the application. Use same Label used on the Grid - Use the field label s configured in the grid . Maximum Size - Maximum field size SQL Type - Field type in the database.
VALUES FORMAT
Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Selects the display format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Date And Time
Data type - Define the application field type. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. SQL Type
VALUES FORMAT
Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Selects the display format of the field. Internal Format - Format that will be recorded in the database. Use ComboBox - Use a combox to select the field info
Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS
Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Select
Allows to use in the form field an object type select (combobox).
General Settings
Image1: General Settings
Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Note on the screen bellow the State field, before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method
There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.
Image1: Lookup method selection.
Edition Lookup - Automatic

Populates the select object dynamically, based on a SQL statement, note the SQL statement on the picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command.
Image1: Automatic lookup settings.
Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always
two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value.
Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement.
lookup value
original & lookup values
Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Create Link - Allows to create a link to a list update form. In the picture bellow, the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update.
Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
Edition Lookup - ManuaL

Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow.
Image1: Manual edition lookup.
Attributes: Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).
Single Value
Creates a simple select object, allows only one item selection.
Image2: Single value
lookup settings.
Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Default - Selected value by default. Height- The quantity of rows displayed in this select object.
Multiple values (delimiter)
Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon.
Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter
Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Object number of lines.
Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Value M F S Start 1 1 2 Size 1 1 1
Married Sports Movies Books Traveling
M SP MO BO TR
2 3 3 3 3
1 2 2 2 2
Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value saved a string is MMBO
Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position).
Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Height- Object number of lines.
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3.
Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16
Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13
Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary)
Label - Item displayed text . Height- Object number of lines.
Insert Button - Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button - Update all the item properties. Remove Button - Removes the item from the list. Clear Button - Clear the item edit form. Save Button - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. This option works combined with Title and Title internal value.
lookup value
Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Checkbox using drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
AJAX PROCESSING
Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a
cities list field by changing the state selected.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Double Select
Component that displays two lists of values. In the first list are the values available for selection and the second are the values actually selected.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Figure1: Edition lookup Interface
Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Height - Select object rows quantity Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value.
Lookup Value
Original Value and lookup
Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Checkbox
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type checkbox.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object. Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below.
It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Populates the checkbox object dynamically, based on a SQL statement. Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command.
Attributes: SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Columns - checkbox number of columns. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ).
NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK;ID>;UT when using the semicolon delimiter.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.
Lookup Value
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project.
Edition Lookup - Manual

Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. See picture bellow.
Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface.
Attributes : Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).
Single Value
Selects only on value on the list.
Image2: Edition lookup - Single Value settings.
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. Default - Selected value by default. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Multiple values (Delimiter)
Image3: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (delimiter) settings.
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter- The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. For example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Image4: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (position) settings
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Image5: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (binary) settings
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Insert - Insert Label and Value in the values list. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the item edit form. Save - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.
Lookup Value
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Radio
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type radio.
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it. Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) .
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method
Image1: Lookup type selection

Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table.
Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface
Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Columns - radio number of columns.
Single column Radio
double columns Radio
Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value.
Lookup Value

Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information.
Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.
Attributes : Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Grid Fields
Image1: Field General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type - It defines the field data type on the search. Search Label - The field label used on the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allows to use the same field label used on the grid. Height - Define the field height SQL Type- SQL Field Type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height.
Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Sorting
Attributes: Data Type - "Sorting Fields" is a new feature that enables to be selected the order fields (ORDER BY clause) that are part of the body of the Grid. Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width.
Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5, using the technology Ajax, it provides the fulfillment of a field with more agility.
Attributes: Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility. Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.
Attributes: SQL Select Statement - Enter a select comand use to capture the text. Rows - Define the number of records displayed on each search. Width - Define the capture box width (Capture Text). Search options - Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals, Any part, End equals). Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Incio igual,Qualquer parte e Final igual). Capture Text - When this option is not selected, in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. See an example in the link below.
Display original and lookup value - With this option disabled (=No) displays, for example, only the name of the State in the Capture.
Display label with the description - Allows you to display the label with the description. Choose connection - Select a different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application
object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Number Auto-complete
Attributes: Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Help Settings
Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save Criteria in the Search application, so it is possible to save a search form with criteria to be used afterwards. Rules can be added and with this feature is possible to save search forms criteria by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface
Application Settings
In this configuration the are the common attributes to the created applications through the ScriptCase, following we will describe this attributes.
Image1: Interface of Application Configuration.
Attributes: Application code - Application code determined in the moment of the application creation, this code can be renamed through the main menu. Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives. Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored. Application Images - To Use in business rules implemention, without using macro sc_image. Localization - Language of the generated application, all the hints and messages will be put inside the chosen language. Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values. Share theme variable - Shares theme with other applications based on the session values. Script Error - Allow to show the information of the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Allow to show the SQL command which originated the error. Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Command in the moment of its using. Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace. Edit Project - Allow that other users of the group edit the application. Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP. HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Navigation
Define the navigation attributes of an application.
Figure 1: Navigation interface.
Attributes: Exit URL - Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication. Close Window - When exiting the application, close the browser window. Redirecting URL - URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu. Redirecting Variable - Variable name, which is used to store the URL of the current application.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
This menu shows the global variables being used within the application, the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause, in Lookups, or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name, created by special fields, etc. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session, Post, Get)
Image 1: Global Variables Interface.
Example: Select customerid, customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case, the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. Select the way it is passed to the Control application.
Image 2: Variables Settings Interface.
Shows all global variables used in the application. Attribute - Variable name in the application. Value - Defines variables behavior, this content is subdivided in three blocks, they are: Scope - Defines how the variable is received by the application, if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Variable passing methods : Session - In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. Get - Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line, that means, being visible to the browser. Post - Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form.
Settings - Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time. Type (Input/Output) - Defines if the variable is an input or an output. At execution time in the development environment, a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. Description- Determines where the variable was defined.
Links Grid Links
Links are used to navigate between project applications. From a grid it is possible to create links with other grids, control applications, menus and forms. Using a link between a grid and a form update the grid record. It is also possible to create links to import data from other applications in search forms. See more: How to link a grid with another. How to edit grid records linked with form.
Application Link
Field Link
Capture Link
New Link
The image below is displayed by selecting the New Link option from ScriptCases application menu.
Application - Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link record is displayed on each line .
to edit the
Field - Used to link it to any other type of application. In this link type a field is used as a link between the grid and other applications.
Capture - Used to import data from other grid to a search field. In the search is displayed an icon next to the field.
Application
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link will appear on each line to edit the record. Clicking in the link, the selected form is displayed according to selected format (in an iframe, in the same window or in a new window).
Applications List
Image2: List of Applications.
Application: Select the form application called by the grid.
Parameters definition
Image3: Parameters Definition Interface.
On the image above is displayed, in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global variables). Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are:
Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter. Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter. Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Empty - No value is passed as a parameter.
Link Properties The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to customize the link properties. Link Properties
Image4: Link Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - The options are: Mode Open in the same window Open in another window Open in Iframe Description Display the form in the same browser window, (in another page, the form display substitute the grid). Another window is open to display the form . The form is displayed in an frame, in the same page, below, above, right or left to the grid.
Display the New button on the grid - The button New is displayed on the grids toolbar to add new records.
Shortcut Key to the New button - Define the shortcut key to the add New button. Called application exit URL - Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling grid.
Form Properties Select the buttons to be displayed in form.
Enable Insert button - Enable the buttons New and Insert in form. Enable Update button - Enable the Update button in form. Enable Delete button - Enable the delete button in form. Enable Navigation buttons - Enable the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form. Enable button to edit a grid record -
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe.
Display the called application header - Display form header. Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid application according to selected position. Options are: Bellow, Above, Right and Left. Action after insert - See table below: Attribute Reload the grid Move to the grid end IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels. Save Button - End the link wizard. Action Refresh current page Navigate the grid to the last page
Field Link
Links - Field
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to create a link from grid field to any existing project application. When you select link type field, a drop down list is displayed with all fields available (displayed) in the grid for selection. (See Select Fields ).
Applications List
Image2: Link between application Interface.
The image below display all the project applications (menus, search, reports pdf, forms, grid, tabs and control forms. Select the form application called by the grid.
On the image above is displayed,in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global variables). Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are: Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter. Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter. Empty - No value is passed as a parameter.
Link Properties The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to customize the link properties. Link Properties
Link Operation Mode - The options are:
Mode Open in same window Open in another window Open in Iframe
Description Display the form in the same browser window, (in another page, the form display substitute the grid). Another window is open to display the form . The form is displayed in an frame, in the same page, below, above, right or left to the grid.
Called application exit URL: Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling grid.
Link hint - Message displayed when mouse is dragged over the linking field. Label - Sets the link title in the application. Used when there is more then one link in the same field.
Form Property These options are displayed only when the called application is a form. Allow to select the buttons displayed in the form.
Enable Insert button- Enable the buttons New and Insert in form. Enable Update button - Enable the Update button in form . Enable Delete button- Enable the delete button in form. Enable Navigation buttons- Enable the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form.
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe
Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid application according to selected position. Options are: Bellow, Above, Right and Left. IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels. Save Button - End the link wizard.
Capture Link
Links - Capture
Image1: Capture Link
The capture link is used specifically in the grid search form. This type of link imports data from another grid to the field search form. When capture link type is selected, a list with the fields search form is displayed. Choose a field to receive data through the link.
Applications List
Image3:Applications List Interface
In the image above a list with project available grid applications is displayed. Select a grid application according to the search form field that receives the data.
Fetch field value: - Select a called grid field. This field have the value received by the search form. Enter the values to pass to the parameters - This options is displayed when the called grid have a parameter to pass (for example Where clause with a global variable). The options are: Fixed - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter. Empty- No value is passed as a parameter.
Save Button - End the link wizard.
Editing Links
Links - Editing
Image1: Links Menu
In the Connections folder in the of application menu (Image1)are displayed the links existent in the application and the item New Connection. When an existent link name is selected the image below is displayed allowing it to be edit.
Actions Properties Link Delete Editing the link properties. Edit a Link Delete a link
Programming Overview
ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.
Attributes
Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application.
Image 1: Attribute Settings interface.
Attributes: Attributes - Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. To remove an attribute, click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list.
Libraries
To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e.g. Public Libraries, Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. To manage libraries, access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries.
Methods
Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer, to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods.
Figure 1: Method menu interface.
Creating a new method
Figure 2: Create a new Method.
1. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. See the Figure below.
Figure 3: Adding a Method.
2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. To include a parameter variable in a method, click the 'Var' button:
Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon.
Add the number of variables:
Figure 5: Define Parameters interface
Defining a variable:
Figure 6: Add Parameters interface.
Name: Input a variable name. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called.
* References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable.
To Edit a parameter variable in a method, click the
button:
Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface.
Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field.
3 In order to run a method, it needs to be called within an event. See the example below:
Figure 8: Events.
In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method :
Figure 9: Event method interface
Thus we get the following result when running the application.
Form Applications Overview

Forms Application
This application type updates information in the database using web forms. The update may be direct (INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE) or using stored procedures. A form can be displayed in several formats. It can edit a single record or multiple records in a single page. See the different formats in the image below.
Single Record
Multiple Records
Editable Grid
Editable Grid (view)
The created form applications have many build-in features the table below list some examples according to the features: Feature Hidden Fields Read-Only Fields Description Hide fields in forms display while update field. Fields are displayed but update are not allowed.
Required Fields Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be entered. primary keys are automatically defined as required Fields. Unique Key Procedures Master / Detail Update link table Dependencies Define unique keys with update validation. Use stored procedures for data manipulation. Update various related tables in a single page. Handles N:N relations in a single form. Define form table dependencies. Criticisms are automatically generated according to the definition. According to the field type required validation are generated as well as different formats area available. Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP code. The form events are triggered during the processing in the server or by the browser (AJAX). Link a form with other applications.
Fields Format
Events Programming
Links creation
Form applications examples:
Form Settings
In this module are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format of the form application.
Image1: Interface Configuration.
Attributes: Ajax - Allow to activate the use of ajax resources in the generated application. To use any resource that uses Ajax (Ajax Events, Auto-complete text, etc.) is turn on this option. Orientation - Orientation of the registers in the form, can be: unique register and multiple registers. Single Record: Edit/Add a register per time. Multiple Records: Multiple records can be edited at a time. See the image below each row represents a record in the table. Editable Grid: Some registers can be edited per time. See in the image below that each line represents a register in the table. Editable Grid View: A record can be edited only if open the edit box of a record. See the image below each row represents a record in the table.
Paging - Indicates how will be shown the registers per page. If paging is TOTAL, will listed all form registers of the form in the page. If the paging is PARTIAL, the user can define the number of registers per page. The paging is only defined to orientation by Multiple Registers. Lines per page - Amount of lines of registers per page. This field is only used in forms of Multiple Registers. Lines for inclusion -Amount of registers shown for inclusion. This field is only used in forms of Multiple Registers. Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the alignment of the application in the page. Edges - Allow to organize the exhibition of the application in the page as the informed values in the edges (right, left, top, bottom) in pixels. Table Width - Width value for the application width. The applications of the ScriptCase are
generated in the HTML standard, and are organized in the tables, lines and cells. This parameter define the table width most external to the application. Unit of Table Width - measurement unit used to the table width defined in the previous item, being able to be: percentage, pixel or automatic. In case of percentage will be generated a HTML of the following format <TABLE WIDITH="70%"> if it was informed 70 in the field table width. In pixel, the generated html to the same application will have the tag <TABLE WIDITH="70px">, in the automatic option will be omitted the '%' or 'px' and the browser will automatically dimension the table.
Layout and Behavior
Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of characters allowed in the field. Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus. Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field. Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded. Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any validation errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options: 1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name. 2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application. 3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the dropdown box. 4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications 4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record (Addition mode). 4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record (Edition mode). 4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited. 4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field. 4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is selected it will work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key. 4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This option allows you to set a default value to the field. 4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. 5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages, which are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks. 6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Available just to Forms and Control applications. It is not available for Grid Applications.
Figure 2: Display Interface.
Options: Markers Positioning - Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field. Display message - Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
Its provide validation of unique key at web server side.
Toolbar
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes: Navigation - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form anad used for navigation. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. Update - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form and used for data update. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Button Settings
Image2: Button Settings Interface.
Attributes: Button - Button name.
Label - Define the label displayed on the button. Hint - Define a hint for the button. Access Key - Allows to define fast acess keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image3: Interface of Tool Options.
Attributes: JS Formatting - Use automatic filed format . Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and a icon is displayed in the block title bar linked to the help page. General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linked to the help page.
Log
Sql
In this module are defined the attributes relative to the connection with the table in that the form was created. We can define the primary key, filters, ordinances for the create form.
Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.
Choosing the fields that are primary key - In this function it is shown an combobox object with an asterisk beside, that indicates what are the fields that compose the primary key of the SQL table. In the majority cases, the Scriptcase identifies it, for the cases that this don't happen, the user will must do this identification, using the buttons beside to do the choose of the key. See how the buttons act: On/Off Button - Give or remove the attribute from the primary key of the field. The defined field as primary key presents an asterisk at the left side of its name. All Button - Define all fields as primary key. These fields become to present an asterisk at the left side of its name. None - Remove all fields. Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the process. Ordinance Buttons - They are the arrows that stay at the right side of the combobox. Allow to order the fields of the primary key, putting it in the desired ordinance. To order click on the field and use the arrows to do the movement
Where Condition - Option to the user enter the WHERE clause to filter sql records. Order By - Allows the user write an ORDER BY clause that will determine the order of the records. By default the records are ordered by primary key. Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be traded for another that have the same tables (SQL). Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - These filled fields allows that part of the table name defined in the select to be traded before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
Note: In the first field you must fill it with the variable name. The second field must be filled with the part of the table name to be traded.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the filter does not respect this setting.
Procedures
In this module we can configure a form application so that it use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) in the operations of insertion, update, and exclusion. It isn't necessary to use the three options at the same time, being thus the options that are not configured to use procedures will continue with the Scriptcase standard that are the commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE. See below pass-by-pass the implementation if a Stored Procedure for Insertion in the Database.
Image1: Interface of Stored Procedures for Form.
1- Let's mark the first option: I want to use Procedure to do INSERT. Afterwards, inform the procedure name and the amount of parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Now we define the fields that will be reference to the parameters of the Stored Procedure, as like the type of each parameter (input or output). Afterwards, we click on the button save to finalize this process.
Image3: Passing of values to the Stored Procedure.
Javascript
The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript, that means, for each field you can edit actions associated to its events.
Image1: Edit Javascript Interface
Attributes: Choose the object - In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application, as the object form form. Choose event- In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write the Javascript code. See the available events: onclick - Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur - Occurs when the objects lose focus. See example onChange - Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. See example onFocus - Occurs always that the object gains focus. See example onMouseOver - Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. See example onMouseOut - Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field. See example
Events linked to the form - The events below are directly linked to the form. OnLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, that means, when you navigate from a register to other. When click on the buttons (new, insert, previous, etc). OnSubmit - This event occurs when click on the buttons insert, update and remove
Edit Javascript Selecting the object and its event, then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events, for example: nm_reload_form(); that do a reload on the form.
Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.
Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update". Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market. If it's necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript, we recommend to make tests in different browsers.
OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value. if(document.F1.sex[0].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = false; document.F1.aux_maternity .style.background='FFFFFF' } if(document.F1.sex[1].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = true; document.F1.aux_maternity.style.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index. OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field weekly_hour_job when it loose focus. if (document.F1.tp_folha[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed."); document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = ""; document.F1.weekly_hour_job.focus(); } onChange examples: When modify the Salary of an employee and go out of the field, will occur an onChange, in this moment we use advantage to check if the position is gardener. if (document.F1.salary.value > 5000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener'); } After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the Select: type payment_way, the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel. if(document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == 'avista') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value; } if (document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 2; } if (document.F1.payway [document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60/90') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 3;
} onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color, font color, etc.) when the mouse is over the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
Dependencies
This resource allows to associate tables, it means tables that exist dependences, such as the tables: orders and items. It is possible to remove a register from the Orders table and all its items. Lets see how to do it.
1 - First we must define a new dependence. In this example we will create a dependency between Orders (Dependent table) and the table Customer (Current application). Click on the button new dependency.
2 - We must select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related between the father and child table. In this example only one field will be related that it is the customer id.
3 - Then we must select the key fields: customers -> CustomerID - orders ->CustomerID.
4 - Now we just need to define if it will just show an error message or it will make a cascade delete.
Security
CAPTCHA
This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form. It requires direct user interaction, through the entry of a random sequence of characters, displayed on a dynamically generated image. CAPTCHA means "Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart". Read more: Using CAPTCHA on a login form
Use CAPTCHA - Enable CAPTCHA in the application. Quantity - Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image. List - Characters to be used in the generated image. Label - Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature. Error message - Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated image. Height - Height of the generated image in pixels. Width - Width of the generated image in pixels. Font Size - Captcha font size Reload - Option for the user to request a new code. Select one layout - This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed in the application.
Fields Overview
This interface allow to inform the validation rules abd formatting of the content of each form field . The configuration of the form fields is done clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left side of the Form folder.
Image1: List of fields.
Done this, the system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where must verify if in the field Data type the value attributed by ScriptCase through the SQL table analysis is according to the existing content. In case that it isn't, the user will must select in the list (combobox) an adjusted type to the content of its field. For each Data type selected will be formated a window with diferent characteristics. Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type. Being thus, the formatting of the screen will be according to the chosen type. Afterwards, after the choose of the data type, just complete the others fields of this window and click on the button Save, Compile or Run.
Text
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it accept letters, numbers, characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.
Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field
Password field
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously, separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.
Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8
AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234 A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Validate with Mask - Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask. Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Without field label attribute
Using field label attribute
Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Values Format
Image1: Values Format Interface.
Attributes: Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters. Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter).
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters.
Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts letter, numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.
Image1: Database value interface.
Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters.
Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below.
Image1: Grid Lookup.
Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1: General SettingsInterface.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the
applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Attributes:
Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.
Integer
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only integer numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For
example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
Figure2: Values Format Interface
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator. Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign. Negative number format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept - The field can accepts only positive values, only negative values or positive and negative values. Show a calculator- Displays a calculator.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super,
top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Decimal
General Settings
Interface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as decimal, it accepts real numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the
applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.* Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator.
Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign. Number negative format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value. Show a calculator - Displays a calculator. Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.*
* "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Currency
General Settings
Image1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters, numbers, characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.
Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.* Currency Symbol Usage - Define if the field will show the currency symbol.* Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign.
Negative number format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value. Show a calculator- Displays a calculator. Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.*
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type:
Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.
Date
General Settings
Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
Image1:Interface of Values Format.
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field. (See regional settings). Display - Allows you to select the display format of the field. Use ComboBox - Allows you to select the date and month by combobox. Year as Combo - Allows you to select the year by combobox. "Initial Year" - Define the minimum year selectable. "Actual Year +" - Define the maximum year selectable. Minimum date: Fixed Date - Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented.
Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date. Actual Date with increment - The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment. Actual Date with decrement - The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement. Maximum Date: Fixed Date - Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date. Actual Date with increment - The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment. Actual Date with decrement - The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement.
Display Format - Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field. Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this allow the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar.
DATABASE VALUE
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by
calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top,
text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width.
Help Settings
Time
General Settings
Image1:
Attributes: Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
Figure2:Values Format Interface
Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. (See Regional settings). Time Separator - Define the time separator used in the field. Display - Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats. Display Format - Displays the field format beside the field hour.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
Image1:Values Format Interface.
Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When not selected ( NO) the options Date separator and Time separator are displayed. (See Regional settings). Date separator - Date separator symbol used. Time separator - Time separator symbol used. Display - Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats. Display Format - Display field the format at the fields side. Group Date and Time - Display the Date and Time in the same input field. Display calendar - Display a calendar a calendar to select the date. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id
code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Image (database)
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Note that the images are stored in the database as text. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Max File Size - Defines maximum field length. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS
Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings).
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection).
Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Document (database)
DOCUMENT(Database)
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document, it accept the opening of the file directly, creating a link for each existent document in the database. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. File Name - Field that contains the document file name. File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field
using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The documents are stored separately in the server. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in the Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables in the subdirectory name. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Credit Card Number

The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. Currently ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS, VISA, MASTERCARD and DINER cards.
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the
applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup.
SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Formats
The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field.
Figure2:
Values Format Interface
Attributes: Card Type - Display a selection box with available card companies (flag). Use Title/Deny - Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the ScriptCase (American Express, Diners, Master Card and Visa). The label and value for these options are defined in Negative Value and Title. Negative value - New option value. Title - New option label. Related Field - Define the field that contains the values to validate. Reload Form - Reload the form After after field value update.
DATABASE VALUE
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height.
Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
E-mail
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.
Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Url
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface .
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of access. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).
Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).
See an example in the image below.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors.
Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.
System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a sliding window. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Note on the screen bellow the State field, before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of
KEYS / VALUES. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it.
Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
lookup value
Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on
current project. Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.

Single Value
lookup settings.
Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Value M F S M SP MO BO Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
Traveling
TR
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. Implicit Value 1 2 Item Description Sports Movies
4 8 16
Traveling Books Music
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width.
Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
General Configuration
Image1: Interface of General Configuration.
Attributes: Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Help Settings
Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more information through a box of marking objects. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below. It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Lookup Value

Single Value
Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. For example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). Label Male Female Single Married Sports Value M F S M SP Start 1 1 2 2 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2
Movies Books Traveling
MO BO TR
3 3 3
2 2 2
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies
4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Radio
Use radio object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information of all shown by it. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.
Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

Single column Radio
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Figure1:General SettingsInterface
Data Type - Defines the data type as text auto-complete. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field
Password field
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Validate on submit - Validate fields only when submit. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Values Format
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted.
Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically
read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Maximum Size - Allow to determine the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Allow to determine the minimum value of the field Maximum Value - Allow to determine the maximum value of the field Grouping - Allow to define the decimal separator. Accepts Negative - Allow the field to accept negative value.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Image
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to insert in the field an image. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard images for selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another machine. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.
HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside
the field is clicked.
Label
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just an output. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side. Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute. Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Editor
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Define the field data type. HTML editor type fields accept letters, numbers and special characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Height - Define the editor box height in pixels. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Toolbar
Attributes: Properties : Position - Toolbar position in the HTML Editor. Alignment - Button alignment in the toolbar. Status - Hides or displays the status bar. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar:
Top or Bottom. Amount (Toolbar lines) - Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor. Button layout - Define the toolbar display settings. Preview - Preview the toolbar display settings defined.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Theme
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Application field type Label - Field label in the application. Reload - Reloads form after updates.
Localization
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Application field type. Label - Field label in the application. Reload - Reloads form after updates.
Youtube
General settings
Attributes Data Type - Application field type. Label - Field label in the application. Display Mode - The way the video is displayed, modal or new window. Width - Videos width in pixels. Height - Videos height in pixels. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Database Field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Google Maps
This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API.
Data Type: - Select Google maps as the data type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and is displayed as Client Name. Home - Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API. Display Mode - Defines how the map will be opened. It can either be opened in Modal window or in a New window. Width - Defines the width of the map. Height - Defines the height of the map. Zoom - Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map. API Key- You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API. Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text), which is nothing more than the license to use this service. When you register to use the service, the key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server. All pages (ScriptCase applications) that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering for the Google Maps API. If you have a web server on your machine, you can just get a key for local testing, and that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration. To get your API Key just visit the following site: http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html Link Type - Define the link type. This can be a text link or a button link. Text Link - Specify the text for the link to the map.
Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Displays the SQL (database) field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes: Data Type - Field data type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Barcode
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Layout Overview
In this module we can see how to customize layout of applications and its settings. Allowing us to add Themes(colors) to the application, organize the application fields in different blocks and pages or define heading and footer values. Pages Blocks Colors Schema Header & Footer
Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where in each application it is created a page which has default name pag1 . In applications of form, control and filter it is possible to create more pages to an application. The pages are show in the application in tabs mode, where each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Interface of Configuration of the pages (available only to applications of form, control an filter).
See below an example of a form application using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2).
Image2: Form application using resources of pages.
The form application already bring a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is very indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields in the vertical would be difficult to use. An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3: Interface of Configuration of the Pages.
To include a new page, just fill the two text above of the buttons Insert, in the first field fill the page name and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon, and afterwards click on the button INSERT. To delete a page, just click on the delete button presented on the line of the correspondent page. NOTE: The definition of the pages is only considered by the form in the orientation Unique Register Configurations relative to the folder tab. Attributes: Font Name - Allow to define what font and characters are going to be shown in the field. Click on the icon that is at the right side of the field it is opened a window to font selection. Just select the font in the existing list, that it is transferred to the field below of the list and click on the button Confirm. The window is closed and the option is transferred to the field in the main window. Font Size - Inform the font size desired. Color of the selected font - Field to the color definition to the text that will have the selected tab. Clicking on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected code will be automatically transferred to the field. Color of the selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have the selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field. Color of the non selected font - Allow to define the font color that will have the non selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field. Color of the non selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have the non selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Layout Settings
Header & Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Events Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application. onApplicationInit - This event runs when the application is loading just for the first time. onNavigate - This event runs when navigating from one record to another one. onScriptInit - This event runs when the application is loading. onRefresh - This event runs to reload the page of the application. onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter) depending on application. onValidateFailure - This event runs if the validation is failured. With errors. onValidateSuccess - This event runs if the validation is successfully. Without errors. onBeforeInsert - This event runs before insert a record. onAfterInsert - This event runs after insert a record. onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record. onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record. onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion. onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion. onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to another one, clicking on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.). Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Ajax Events
Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page.
Figure 1: AJAX event interface.
The following events are available in ScriptCase. onChange - This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. onClick - This events fires when the field is clicked. onBlur - This events fires when the field has focus, the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. onFocus - This events fires when the field has focus. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). For valid users it returns the name. For invalid users a message is displayed. Example:
1 - Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process, (in PHP code). Passing parameters is
optional.
Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing.
2 -Enter
the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser.
Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX.
1. PHP editor - Use it to type in your PHP code. 2. Insert Code - ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. 3. Parameters (Fields) - Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Buttons Buttons
New Button
To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Types button: (Javascript, PHP, Linking).
Image2: New button function.
Deleting a button
Javascript Button

Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application.
Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Icon - Button display icon. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.
To not display a message, leave this field blank. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window).
Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Deleting a button
Php Button

Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window).
Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Code
Image2: Php
Interface.
Deleting a button
Link Button

Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.
Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
The link button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

Image2:Create new Linking.
Image3: Link Type
Interface.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Value or Empty. Field - Enter the field used to pass the content.
Image5: Parameters Definition
Interface - Field.
Fixed - Enter a fixed content to be passed.
Image6: Parameters Definition Interface - Value. Empty - No value will be pass.
Image7: Parameters Definition Interface - Empty.
Image8: Link/Form Properties
Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link. Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going to the form. Open in other window - Open another window to show the form. Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same in the same window that the search, below of search an Iframe is created to display the form. Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Hint of the Link - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field. Form Properties - Select the buttons that will be shown.
Deleting a button
Master/detail Form Overview
MASTER/DETAIL FORM
Allow to create update forms to update tables 1:N in a single window.
Image1: Master / Details orders and orders Items Form.
See more: How to create a Master Detail
New Detail
In the application menu , clicking in the item New Detail from the folder Master/Detail Form create a new detail link.
Image1: Creating a new Master/Detail.
Defining name and label
Enter detail link name and label.
Application List
The Wizard lists the project applications available to link. Select the called application from the list by checking the box.
Note: The detail form required type is Grid, Editable grid or Editable grid view. Only these types are listed by the Wizard.
Parameters settings
In the column Field (image left side) all master form fields are displayed. In the column Key (image right side) is displayed the detail form fields. Usually the detail form foreign key are associated to the primary key to the master form.
Editing Form Detail
Link Property
Its possible to change the Link properties by clicking in the created link.
Attributes: Form properties - Select the buttons displayed (operations performed) in the detail form. Iframe properties - Configurein pixels the iframe height and width where to display the detail form. Other Properties: Editable Grid - Select if the detail form is editable. Paging - Select paging mode: Partial Paging according to number of records configured. Total Display all records.
Lines per page - configure the lines number (records displayed) for Partial paging. When deleting - Choose dependency treatment mode:
Criticize if child row exists Also delete child row
Display error message for form dependencies with the detail record. Exclude all dependent records in detail form.
Edit Link - This button update the detail application link.
Many-to-many Relationships
Configure M:N relationship tables.
See more : Update related table Updating Many-to-Many Relationship via CheckBox List
Image1: Generated application with associated tables
Identification
This link is treated as a field in the Form application. Define Field name, Data type, Label and specific Connection for this link. For specific connection is displayed a select with the project available connections.
Image2: Create a relationship field
Grid Information
Define the select (lookup) data source. Enter a select command or base it on a table.
Image3: Enter a select command.
For the option Choose Table 3 objects select are displayed allowing to choose the table and the fields Key and Description.
Image4: Select command base on a table.
Key - Value stored in the relationship table. Description - Value displayed in the update field.
Command Select
Select Command to display the update field values available.
Image5: Select Command.
Lookup Display
Image6: Lookup display field.
Define the update display format.
Image7: Field object type.
Display key and description - Display the key and the description entered in the select command. Display Title - Display the relationship attribute title. (see relationship attribute).
Separator - Define a delimiter between key and description when the option selected is Display key and description. Object - Lookup object type to display in the form. Available types: Select, Double Select, Checkbox and Radio. Check and Uncheck all - Enable an option to check or uncheck all values( available only to Checkbox). Columns - Define number of columns displayed (available only to objects Checkbox and Radio).
Relationship Table
Image8: Relationship table.
Define the relationship table updated.
Image9: Select table.
Relationship Key
Image10: Link key.
Define the application fields related to the relationship table fields.
Image11: Defining update table field values.
Lookup Field
Image12: Lookup field.
Define the lookup table field related to the relationship table.
Image13: Defining table foreign key.
Relationship Attributes
Image14: Application view generate with the relationship attribute type Access Type. Define the values stored in the relationship table fields that are not foreign keys.
Image15: Defining field attribute.
Dados Entry - Store a value entered by the user. Create a field and relate it via the select. Attribute - Store an application field value.
Search (only for Double Select)
Image16: Double Select Filter.
Define a search to the relationship table.
Image17: Search field settings.
Limit of Records - Maxim quantity of records return by the search. Initial State - Define the object load state. Search fields - Define search fields (Key and/or Description) to display.
Display Settings (optional)

attributes, title and object..
Define relationship field display settings such as CSS field
Image18: Display Settings.
Help Settings
Define applications attributes.
Image1: Application Settings
Interface.
Attributes: Application code - Application code determined in the moment of the application creation, this code can be renamed through the main menu. Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives. Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored. Application Images - Specific images used by this application. Localization - Generated application language used, all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language. Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application. Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application. Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace. Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application. Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message. Update and removes lines... - Records can be selected in the checkbox to be updated or removed. HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application. Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application. Message Title - Text used in title line as label. Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Image2: ErrorSettingsInterface. Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom. Show error title in the application - Allow to show the title line of the error message. Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field. The standard value is deactivate. Error title - Title of the error message in the application. Error Script - Show information of the script and line where the error occurs. Error SQL - Show the SQL command that originated the error. Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands in the moment of its use. Ajax error output - Open a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode. Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes: Exit URL - Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication. Close Window - When exiting the application, close the browser window. Redirecting URL - URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu. Redirecting Variable - Variable name, which is used to store the URL of the current application. Message after insertion - Message to be shown after the insertion of a register. Will occur the navigation to other page and the message will be shown, soon below of the message will appear the button OK that when is clicked return to the form. Message after update - Message to be shown after the update of a register. Will occur the navigation to other page and the message will be shown, soon below of the message will appear the button OK that when is clicked return to the form. Return After inserting - Define the application return mode: return to edit a record after insert it or open the new record mode after insertion. Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Shows all global variables used in the application. Attribute - Variable name in the application. Value - Defines variables behavior, this content is subdivided in three blocks, they are: Scope - Defines how the variable is received by the application, if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Variable passing methods : Session - In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. Get - Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line, that means, being visible to the browser.
Post - Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. Settings - Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time. Type (Input/Output) - Defines if the variable is an input or an output. At execution time in the development environment, a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. Description- Determines where the variable was defined.
Express Edition
Synchronize Table
This process will realize a comparison between the definitions of the application fields and the table fields that has origin in the database. In case that in origin table occurs any update, as for example the inclusion of a new field, or exclusion, or still a change in the data type, this update will show it visible as seen in the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table function interface.
After accessing the function from the link Synchronize table is show a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the table fields of the database (right table), above Image, the marked fields in red will be deleted of the application, the marked fields in Green will be inserted in the form, and the marked fields in orange will be updated, so they suffer type update in the database.
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
We use to link the form application which we are defining with other applications, we can link our form with application of the types: Search, Form, Control, Menu and Tab. There are three types of links available: Application - Used to link our form to any other type of application. This linking type is associated to events of Inclusion and/or alteration, when occurs one of those events the navigation will be effected to the application that we are calling. Field - Used to link our form through a link to any other type of application. For effecting this linking we have to create a special field of the type Formula Label and associate to it the linking. Capture - Will be created an icon beside the field inside the form, when being selected it opens other window showing a search application. In this application that will be opened can do searches and return a value to text field. In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent linking or to do a creation of a new application.
Image1: Menu of Links.
Creating Links In the screen below the user will must specify which the linking type to be effected, Application, Field or Capture.
Image2: Interface of Linking between applications.
Used to link our form to each other type of the application. This linking type is associated to events of Inclusion and/or Alteration, when occurs one of this events the navigation will be effected to the application that we are calling. The window below Application List show the form applications, the user will must choose the application which will must be linked and clink on Continue >>.
Image3: Interface Linking between application.
In the window below Definition of Parameters, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected the option for passing value, there are three options, they are: Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content. Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed. Empty - Choosing this option it will be passed no value to the field.
Image4: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
In the window below Linking Properties will must be filled the relative attributes to the linking.
Image5: Interface of Linking Properties.
Attributes: Redirecting after insert - With this option activated, when occurring the inclusion will be done the navigation for the application that we are linking. Redirecting after Update - With this option activated, when occurring the alteration will be done
the navigation for the application that we are linking. Form property - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar of the filter.
Will be created an icon beside the field in the filter form, when being selected it opens another window showing a search application. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value to the text field.
The window below Linking Type show that when it is selected the linking Capture Type, appears a combobox with the fields of the origin application to be selected the field that will be used for the link.
Image6: Interface Parameter Definition.
The window below Application List show the search applications, the user will must choose the application which will must be linked and click on Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface
In the window below Definition of Parameters, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected the option for passing value, there are three options, they are: Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content. Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed.
Empty - Choosing this option it wil be passed no value to the field.
Recovering the field value - It should be selected the field of the search application to the linking object, so its content return for the field the filter form.
Image8: Interface Parameter Definition.
Concluding the linking, the user will be able to update and remove the linking done, as its necessary.
Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Tabs Applications Overview

Tabs applications
This application type allows to organize multiple applications display in one single screen in a tab structure. Usually applications related to a common topic are grouped into a tab application for example: Employees / Projects.
Image1: TABS application.
Tabs Tab Settings
Image1: Tab Settings Interface.
This property, Tab Settings, allows to define the following attributes: Title - Application title that will be shown in the toolbar. Organization - Allow that the application run in the folders through an iframe or normal. Type - How the folders organization will be presented, it can be: Folder above - Display the folders above the application. Folder below - Display the folders below the application, next to the footer. Folder in the left - Align the folders in the left, like a vertical menu. Folder in the right - Align the folders in the right. Menu above - Have the same principle of 'Folder above', but its visual schema has the menu style. Menu below - Have the same principle of 'Folder below', but its visual schema has the menu style. Menu in the left - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the left', but its visual schema has the menu style. Menu in the right - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the right', but its visual schema has the menu style. Side by Side - Show all applications in folders order, one next other. Table size - Size of the main table. Measurement Unit - The unit used by table size. Can be: Pixel or percentage. Tab Alignment - Define the tab position. Can be: center, left or right. Application Alignment - Define the application position, Can be: center, left, or right. Exit - Define how the app will be presented, can be:
Button on the bottom of the page. Folder. Button in the toolbar Exit Icon - You can define the icon of the exit button on the toolbar. Use the image selection resource to visualize and select in easy way the desired image.
Folder Settings
This function serve to link each folder with a pre-existent application.
Image1: Folder Settings Interface.
Add a folder - To create a tab, click in 'Add' and fill these fields: Label - Application name that will be shown in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data, Finance Data, etc.); Image - Choose an image that will be used on this tab; Update - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the desired data. Finally, click on the 'update' button. Delete - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item. Clean - Clean all data of selected item.
Here we define the application for each tab. See the picture:
Image1: Application Settings Interface.
Initially the user must click on the tab that want to update. You have the following options: Add - When you click in 'Add', a screen with app list will show up to choose the application. (Picture 2). Edit - Select the application and then, click on edit button. The following steps are selection of the application and the definition of the iframe size (Picture 3), requested in the add application process. Remove - Select the application that you want to delete and click on remove. How to Add and Edit Applications Selecting the application and click on 'Next', as the screen below:
Image2: Application Link Interface.
On the next screen you define a few parameters of the link:
Iframe width - Width size of the iframe. If you put in 100% the application will be adjusted more easily. Iframe height - Height size of the iframe. If this size is small than your app, a scrollbar will appear automatically. Reload Iframe - When this option is enabled makes the application of the tab, to be reloaded each time you change the tab. Parameters / Value - For each parameter of the application that we choose, you have options to be chosen, they are: Variable - Name of the global variable to get the content. Value - Static content to be loaded for the parameter in the execution time. Empty - Leave empty or do not change if it has some value.
Security
Pdf Settings
In this window, the user will define the configuration of the PDF, available in tab application, as following:
Image1: PDF Settings Interface.
You have the following attributes: Create PDF - Define if the app will have the output in PDF format. PDF Orientation - Define how will be the orientation sense of the generated reports in PDF, can be: picture or landscape. PDF Format - Format of the pages generated in PDF, as: Letter, A4, A5, etc. Open PDF Directly - Indicate if the application will allow to generate the PDF directly by the button or if will be through a link to the PDF. Allow to print - This option allow that the user print the PDF. Allow to modify - This option allow that the user modify the PDF.
Layout Layout Settings
Header
FOOTER
Log
Here we have the general application settings: Application Code - Application name and code for ScriptCase internal use. Connection - ScriptCase connection used by this application. Default Profile - Default connection profile to be used on production environment. Localization - Generated application language used, all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language. Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application. Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application. Exit URL - URL address to be when the user click in exit button. Folder - Folder where the application will be placed in scriptcase work area. Description - Name descriptive of the application. HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Container Applications Overview

Container Application
Allows you to display various types of applications nested on Widgets similar to those for iGoogle. They are usually incorporated into reports and / or Charts that display information from the database, also can be displayed information external URL's.
Image1: Containers Display.
Container Container Settings
Image1: Container Settings Interface.
This property Container Settings allows to set the following attributes: Column Width -Column width where will be the Widget. Add Column - Adds a Widget to the selected column. Remove Column - Removes the selected column and all the Widgets that are associated with the column.
Widget Title - Title that will appear in the Widget. Link - Application or URL to be loaded into the Widget selected. Height - Height of the Widget in pixels. Reload time - Charging time of application or URL selected in the Widget, it must be defined in seconds. Mobile - Allows to change the Widget column at run time. Removable - Allows to be remove the Widget at runtime. Collapsible - Allows to expand the Widget at run time. Maximize - Allows to maximize the Widget at run time.
At the page bottom we can see two more options: Add Column - Adds a column to the Container application. Save - Saves the Columns and Widgets information.
Security
Layout Layout Settings
Header & Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Log
Image1: Settings Interface.
In this folder you define the application attributes , such as: Application Code - Application code for ScriptCase internal use. Should begin by letter. Connection - Connection name used by ScriptCase to access the tables. User can select it. Locales - Application language. Session Locales - Provides a variable locales in session. Folder - A folder containing the application. Editing by Project - If you have Not checked the application can only be edited by the owner. Description - Application descriptive name. HelpCase Link - Help Page.
Control Applications Overview

Control Application
This application type is structured differently from form applications. It is not based on a database table, allowing the form creation using fields added manually and source validation. Common examples of this application type are the forms for login and batch processing.
Figure1: Control Interface
Functionality Hidden Fields Read-Only Fields Fields Required Fields Format Events Programming
Description Hide fields in forms display while keep the field value from form to submit. Fields are displayed but edit are not allowed. Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be entered. According the field type required validation are generated, different formats area are available. Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP code. The form events are triggered during the processing in the server or by the browser (AJAX).
Links creation Link a form with other applications..
Control Settings
In this window are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format and the way of update.
Figure 1: Settings Interface.
See below the attributes description: Attributes: Use Ajax - Allow to define if the application will have support to Ajax. Keep Values - Allow to keep the values of the last access to the form, thus having this value in the next access. Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the horizontal alignment of the application. The options are: center, left and right. Edges - Allow to define the application edges (Above, below, right and left). Table Width - Allow to define the table width of the application. Table width unit - When defining the property Table width can determinate the width unit, they are: Percentage, Pixels and Automatic.
Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options: 1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field. 2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application. 3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type. 4 - Read-Only - Define if the field is just read-only. 5 - Required - Define if the field is required or not.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields, blocks and pages. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Toolbar
Define toolbar attributes and options such as validation, formatting and help settings.
Figure 1: Toolbar Interface
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:Top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously. Attributes: Navigation - Buttons used to navigate on the application or exit from control application. Other - Other buttons type: Theme, Webhelp, PHP, Javascript or link button. Ordinance of the buttons - This option lets you define what will be the display order of buttons used in the application.
sEttings buttons
Figure 3: Toolbar Settings Interface.
Attributes: Button - Show all buttons selected in application. Label - Set a label for button. Hint - Set a message that will show when the mouse is on the button.
Access Keys - Allows you to set hotkeys keyboard to a button.
OPTIONS
Figure 4: Toolbar Options Interface.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Allow to define if there is automatic fields formatting on the form. Help by Block - Indicates if the helps of the relative fields, will be grouped per block. In each field we can define a text of help to it, with this option activated appear an icon in the title bar of the block to the calling of the help page . General Help - General help consolidates all fields help in a unique page, placing an icon in the toolbar to calling the help page.
Log
Sql
In this group is defined the attributes relative to the connection to the database.
Figura1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes: Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed with another that have the same tables (SQL). Case Sensitive - This option should be set to "No" only if the database is configured for casesensitive and it is should not respect this setting.
Fields Overview
This interface allows informing the rules of validation and formatting of the content of each field of the control. The configuration of the fields is made giving a click in the field to be formatted, in the existing list, the left part of the folder ?Form?.
. Made this, the system opens a screen to the right of this list, where it must be verified if in the field Type of the Data the value attributed for the ScriptCase through the analysis of table SQL is in accordance with the existing content. In case that he isn?t, the user will have selecting in the list (combobox) a type adjusted for the content of its field. For each Type of selected Data a screen with different characteristics will be formatted. Example: Fields of the type Text possess different characteristics of a field of the type Date. Thus being, the formatting of the screen will be in accordance with the chosen type.
Text
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings
Interface
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it accept letters, numbers, characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field.
Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field
Password field
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as multiple lines text, it accepts letters, numbers, characters. Upon selecting the data type as multiple lines text the attribute Lines is enabled to definethe number of lines is selected. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For
example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Integer
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accepts only integer numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For
example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Decimal
General Settings
Figure1: .General Settings Interface.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.* Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign. Number negative format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value.
Show a calculator - Displays a calculator. Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.*
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Currency
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as currency, it accepts only decimal values. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date
General Settings
Attributes Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:
Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Time
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific Time rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes : Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific Data and Time rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Image (file Name)
Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings).
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image (file name) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window.
Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Image field example in a product list.
Image2: Image field with picture.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
DOCUMENT(File name)
Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload documents. The documents are save in a directory defined in the server using the attribute Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu (see Settings).
General Settings
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS
Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in
the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.
Credit Card Number
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes : Data type - Define the application field type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Formats
Figure2:
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
E-mail
General Settings
Attributes: >Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats. Label - Field title in application. Initial Value - Populates the field with a pre-defined value when the end-user clicks on the "new" button. Select from the options below: Defined Value - Uses the value entered for the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to receive parameters by using this function. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created at a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: When you use the System Date option, you do not need to enter an Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed for the field when using the Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.
Field without label attribute. Field with label attribute. HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Url
General Settings
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes Data type- Define the application field type. URLfields display links. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
GRID LOOKUP
Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved.
To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Help Settings
Html Color
General Settings
Figure1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color an icon is displayed by its side with a colors palette. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
GRID LOOKUP
Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.
Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Select
Use a select (combobox)) object in form field.
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
lookup value

Single Value
lookup settings.
Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.
Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Object number of lines.
Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.
Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16
Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Double Select
Component that displays two value lists. A list with values available to select and another with the selected values.
Figure1: Double Select object .Available values/ Selected values.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type- The field type Double Select is a drop-down object that allows the selection of multiple information using two list boxes and a navigator ( << < > >> ). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Check Box
CHECKBOX
Use a checkbox objecto in form field.
General Settings
Atributos: Data type - The field type checkbox is an object that allows the single or multiple information using an objects selection box. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Lookup Value

Single Value
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field
See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a
cities list field by changing the state selected.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Radio
Use a radio object in form field.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type- The field type Radio is an object that allows the selection of a single information from all information displayed. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

Single column Radio
Lookup Value

Attributes : Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Image
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Image it displays an image. Label - Field title in application. Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard images for selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another machine. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Label
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Label fields are display only fields. Label - Field title in application. Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side. Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute. Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings
Text field
Password field
Values Format
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted.
Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters.
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Attributes:
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For
example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
VALUES FORMAT
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Menu Links
Create a menu structure in the form.
Proprieties: Data type - Define the application field type. Label - Field title in application. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Values Format
Proprieties: Menu Item - Insert , Update and Remove menu items control. Label - Define menu item label. Link - Define an application or extern link called when a menu item is selected. Icon - Define the icon displayed at the item link side for the display Link mode. Default - Define it the menu item is selected by default in the display modes (Select and Radio ). Insert - Insert new menu item Update -Update menu item.
Remove - Remove menu item. Clear- Clear a menu item data Clear all - Remove all menu items data. Display Mode - Menu Links generation format : Select , Radio or Link: Example using Select mode :
Example using Radio mode :
Example using Link mode :
Hide Label - Do not display the link labels. This option is available to the Display Link mode.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Profile
Display the production environment connections available in a Select object at run time. To use this option do not enter the connection name at deployment time. See deployment.
Label - Field title in application.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Editor Html
Toolbar
Attributes: Properties : Position - Toolbar position in the HTML Editor. Alignment - Button alignment in the toolbar. Status - Hides or displays the status bar. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar: Top or Bottom.
Amount (Toolbar lines) - Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor. Button layout - Define the toolbar display settings. Preview - Preview the toolbar display settings defined.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center
or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Locales
Add an select object to the application. The object allows to select a language for the project application.
Data type - Define the application field type. Label - Field title in application.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Javascript
Attributes: Choose the object - In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application, as the object form form. Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write the Javascript code. See the available events: onclick - Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur - Occurs when the objects lose focus. See example onChange - Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. See example onFocus - Occurs always that the object gains focus. See example onMouseOver - Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. See example onMouseOut - Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field. See example
Edit Javascript Selecting the object and its event, then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events, for example: nm_reload_form(); that do a reload on the form.
OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value. if(document.F1.sex[0].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = false; document.F1.aux_maternity .style.background='FFFFFF' } if(document.F1.sex[1].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = true; document.F1.aux_maternity.style.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index. OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field weekly_hour_job when it loose focus. if (document.F1.tp_folha[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed."); document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = ""; document.F1.weekly_hour_job.focus(); } onChange examples: When modify the Salary of an employee and go out of the field, will occur an onChange, in this moment we use advantage to check if the position is gardener. if (document.F1.salary.value > 5000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener');
} After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the Select: type payment_way, the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel. if(document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == 'avista') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value; } if (document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 2;
} if (document.F1.payway [document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60/90') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 3; } onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color, font color, etc.) when the mouse is over the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
Security
CAPTCHA
Layout Layout
Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes, organizing fields in blocks, and defining header formats, amongst other options. Blocks Settings Header & Footer
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Colors Schema
Layout Settings
Header & Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Events Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application.
Image 1: Event Button access of Control application. onApplicationInit - Occurs once when the application is loaded (first time). onScriptInit -Occurs when the application is loaded onRefresh -This event is executed during the application page reload. onValidateSucess -Occurs when validation is successful. . onValidateFailure -Occurs when a validation failure is found. onValidate - This event is executed by clicking on validation buttons (ok, update, insert, delete, search) depending on the used application. In case of form the buttons are: update, insert and delete. onLoad - This event occurs when the browser loads the window. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Ajax Events
optional.
2 -Enter
Buttons Buttons
New Button
Deleting a button
Javascript Button
Creating a Javascript Type Button AJAX EVENTS

The following events are available in ScriptCase. onChange - This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. onClick - This events fires when the field is clicked. onBlur - This events fires when the field has focus, the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. onFocus - This events fires when the field has focus. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). For valid users it returns the name. For invalid users a message is displayed.
Example:
optional.
2 -Enter
1. PHP editor - Use it to type in your PHP code. 2. Insert Code - ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. 3. Parameters (Fields) - Use this to create parameters retrieving field values.
Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Php Button
Creating a Php Type Button AJAX EVENTS

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter
Code
Image2: PHP
Interface.
Link Button
Creating a Linking type button AJAX EVENTS

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter
Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros. The linking button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Linking button, and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

Image3: Link Type
Interface.
Interface - Field.
Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link. Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going to the form. Open in other window - Open another window to show the form. Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same in the same window that the search, below of search an Iframe is created to display the form. Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Linking Link Hint- Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field. Form Properties - Select the buttons that will be shown. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Define common ScriptCase application attributes.
See below the attributes description:
Attributes:
Application Code - Application Code assigned during application creation. Description - Used to describe application goals. Images Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored. Documents Path - . The absolute path where the application documents are stored. ApplicationImages - Specific images used by this application. This option deploys the images called in event with the application. Example: echo "<img src='image_button.png' width='30' height='30' />" ;
application.
Choose an image uploaded to ScriptCase before. Upload new image.
Remove the image in
Localization - Generated application language (all the hints and messages) and locales (specific data types format) Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace. Edit Project - Allow other users of the group to edit the application. Timeout - Execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP Timeout Message- Show a message after timeout limit. HelpCase Link - Associate a Help Manual to your application. Maximum file size - Set the upload maximum file size for image or document field. Message title- Message box displayed title Use Enter to tab -The 'Enter' key have the same function of 'Tab' key..
Error Settings
Define ScriptCase applications error settings. See below the attributes description:
<img src="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv6/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0685_confi_erro.png" ">

Image 3: Error Settings Interface
Attributes: Error Position - Application error position : right, left, up and down. Display error title in application - Display error message line with the error title. Display error title in field - Display line with title in error field. Error Title - Error title message in application. Script Error - Display script line and info where the error occurred.
SQLError - Display SQL command that originated the error. DebugMode - Run application in debug mode displaying SQL commands Ajax Error output - Display Ajax events SQL and PHP output in a window.
Navigation
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Links Links
Links the control application that we are defining with other applications of the following types: Grid, Form, Control, Menu and Tab. There are 4 links types available: Application - It is used to link the control to another application type. This type of link call the other application during onsubmit event of calling application. Field - Used to connect the control via a to any other type of application. To make this connection we should create a special field type Label and associate the same connection. Capture - Creates an icon next to the field inside the control application, when selected it opens another window displaying a grid application. In the open application the user can start a search and return a value to a text box. Button - Used to connect the form to another application by clicking on the button previously created (link type Button ). The user can edit an existing link or create a new one using the "New LInk" option.
Figura Link between applications interface - Links created.
Link Type - Application Linking Type - Capture Link Type - Field Link Type - Buttons
Links - Application
Link Type - Application

Used to link the Form to any other applications type. This link type is associated to submit events. When an event occurs then the application is redirected to the called application. The Applications List displayall applications. The user can choose the application that will be linked and click in Next >>
Figure4: Link between applications Interface
Parameter definition, at left side, display the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that needs to receive parameters. Select the option to inform the value, there are three options: Field - Inform the field to be use its value. Fixed - inform a fixed value. Empty - No value is passed to the field.
Link to an Application:
Figure5: Parameters Definition with global Variable Interface
Link Properties define the link attributes
Link to Grid Application:
Link to Form Application:
Figure8: Link to Grid Application Properties
Figure9: Link to Form Application Properties
Attributes: Link Propreties - Select the target where application will open. Form Properties - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar. Grid Property - Define the grid settings
"Linking" display the link created with action buttons.
Links - Button
Link Type - Buttons

A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application. Using the opened application to search for information, add, edit or delete a record.
Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application.
Select the link button to enable.
Figure 31: Link Type Interface
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must seelect the application to be linked and click in Next >>
Figure 32: Interface of linking between applications.
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to inform the value, there are two options, and they are:
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed value. Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the field.
Figure 33: Parameters Definition Interface with global Variable.
Figura 35: Parameters Definition Interface
In Linking Properties enter the link relative attributes.
Figure 36: Link Properties to Grid Application.
Figure 37: Link Properties to Form and Control Application.
Attributes: Link Operation Mode- Allows choose the target where application will open. Exit URL for the Target Application Hint of The link - Enter a text to display when the mouse is over the button. Form Properties - Allows to select the buttons displayed in the toolbar. Grid Property - Allows configure the grid settings.
Below "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure 38: Link Interface
Links - Capture
LinkType - Capture
A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value for the text field.
The screen below Linking Type shows that, when it is selected the linking type Capture, it appears a combobox with the fields of the origin application, to be selected the field that will be used for the Link.
Figure12: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must select the application to be linked and click in Next >>
Figure13: Interface of Linking between applications
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to inform the value, there are two options, and they are:
Figure15: Parameters Definition Interface with parameters.
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed Value. Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the global variable.
Figure16 : Link Properties Interface
Modal - Displays the called application with dark background.
Figure17 : Example of capture link using modal target.
Below, "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure18: Linking Interface
Recover the field value - Selected a field of the grid application called linking object and it returns a value to a field of the control form.
Links - Field
Link Type - Field
A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application. Using the opened application to search for information, add, edit or delete a record.
This link mode only enables when the control application have a label type field created.
Figure 21: Option to create a label field.
More details, Click here to see a tutorial.
Select the Label field to enable.
Figure 22: Link Type Interface
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must select the application to be linked and click in Next >>
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to inform the value, there are two options, and they are: Field - Enter the field used to get the value. Fixed - In this case, in the text field inform a fixed value. Empty - No value is passed to the field.
Link to an Application:
Figura 26: Parameters Definition Interface
Figure 27: Link Properties to Grid Application.
Figure 28: Link Properties to Form and Control Application.
Attributes: Link Propreties - Allows to select the target where application will open. Form Properties - Allows to select the buttons shown in the toolbar. Grid Property - Allows to configure the grid settings
Below, "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Blank Applications Overview

This type of application allows the developer to write PHP / HTML code and display a process result. A good example of its use is called the batch process, the advantage of using this application instead of creating a .php program manually outside the ScriptCase is the possibility of using ScriptCase macros well as native integration with control access to their systems.
Blank Onexecute
In this menu is entered the PHP code that will run by the application.
Image1: OnExecute.
Attributes: OnExecute - Allows to entry PHP commands, ScriptCase macros and to use code libraries.
Any event can use pre-defined functions available in Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". See more about Scriptcase Macros.
Sql
In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application types (forms, inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands using other connections than the native application connection.
Image1: SQL Settings.
Attributes: Connection - Allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.
Security
The blank applications can have their access password-protected or use your project security settings, see below the two options highlighted.
Image1: Security Options.
Use security - Disable access to this application and only allow access to authorized users, read more. Use Password - Set a password for this particular application.
Log
Applications Settings
In this folder are common attributes to applications created by ScriptCase, bellow is described these attributes.
Image1: Settings Interface
Atributos: Application Code - Application code given when creating the application, this code can be renamed via the main menu. Description - This field can be used to enter a brief application description. Application Images - To use images within the application in implementations of Business Rules, eliminating the use of macro sc_image. Locales - Application generated language , all the hints and messages will be placed in the chosen language. Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workgroup. Editing by Project - .Allow other project users to edit the application.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface
Atributos: Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, displaying the SQL commands as they are executed.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Menu Applications Overview

Menu application
Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also possible to create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time depending on the user profile.
Image1:Horizontal menu.
Image2: Vertical Menu Interface.
Menu Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as following:
Image1: Menu SettingsInterface.
Attributes: Orientation - Orientation of the menu in the screen : horizontal line or vertical.
Horizontal
Vertical
Note: Whenever defining the orientation as vertical, it is necessary to adjust the option menu width.
Horizontal Alignment Of Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or rigth. Vertical Alignmentof the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom. Horizontal alignment of items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth. MenuWidth- Width in pixels or percentage of the menu. MenuHeight - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu. Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened. Iframe Height - Heightin pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened. Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security schemes or access control. Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick. Preserves icons space - Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon. Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar. Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar. Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar. Theme and language alignment - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu. Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL .
Menu Items
MENU ITEMS
Use this interface to structure the menu, indicating which the applications are called.
Image1: Menu Settings Interface
Label - Application title in the menu. Link - Application name. The user can click in to select the application..
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Click in to select the image desired. (Optional) Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional). Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process (Icons on the top of the menu list). Insert item - Add a menu item. Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu. Remove - Removes an item from the menu. Select the item or sub-item, and click in the button to remove. Import - Import applications from the project creating links to them. Move Up - Move up a menu item or sub-item. Move Down - Move Down an item or sub-item. Move Left - Move an item or sub-item to the left, removing a level from it. Move Right - Move an item or sub-item to the right, adding a level to it.
Linking applications is easy and fast. Select an application from a list to add to the menu after we click on the icon on the side of the link text box. To structure the menu use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface.
Security
Events Events
Figure 1:Menus Event Interface.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized. Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads. Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Layout Overview
Layout Settings
Header
FOOTER
Log
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes: Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An application can be renamed using the main menu. Connection - Defines the connection used by the ScriptCase to access database tables. Language - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values. Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values. Charset - Selects the charset that will be used on the application. Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. Description - Descriptive application name and information. Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application. HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.
Convert Menu
CONVERT MENU
It is used to convert an Menu application to a Tree Menu format. It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Menu Tree Applications Overview

Tree Menu application
Tree Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also possible to create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time for example depending on the user profile.
Image1: Tree menu application.
Menu Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as follows:
Image1: Menu SettingsInterface.
Attributes: Horizontal Alignment Of Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or rigth. Vertical Alignmentof the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom. Horizontal alignment of items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth. MenuWidth- Width in pixels or percentage of the menu. MenuHeight - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu. Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be opened. Iframe Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be opened. Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security schemes or access control. Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick. Preserves icons space - Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon. Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar. Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar.
Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar. Theme and language alignment - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu. Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL .
Menu Items
Image1: Menu Settings Interface.
Using this option define the menu structure and the called applications. Enter the following attributes: Label - Application title in the menu. Link - Application name. The user can click in to select the application..
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Click in to select the image desired. (Optional) Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional). Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process. Insert item - Add an application to the menu. ( as an item) Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu. Update - Modify a menu item or sub-item. Remove - Removes an item from the menu. Select the item or sub-item, and click in the button to remove. Clean item - Clean the picture of attributes. Clean Menu - Excludes all items and sub-items from the menu. Import Applications - Select the applications that will be called. .
Importing applications is easy and fast. Selects applications from a list to add to the menu. To structure the menu use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface. After importing the applications, the link receives the name from the application as below:
Security
Events Events
Figure 1: Event button access of Menu application.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized. Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads. Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Layout Overview
Layout Settings
Header
FOOTER
Log
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes: Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An application can be renamed using the main menu. Connection - Defines the connection used by ScriptCase to access database tables. Localization - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values. Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values. Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. Edit Project - Allow users to edit the application. Description - Descriptive application name and information. Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application. HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.
Convert Menu
CONVERT MENU
It is used to convert a Tree Menu application to a Menu application format. It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Search Applications Overview

Search applications
Used to search data to form applications. It is created based on a SELECT statement, this application type works necessarily linked to a form application Some search form features: Feature Fields formatting Search condition Fields validation Description The search form automatically formats several fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc. Define the search criteria individually for each search field. The search form automatically validates several fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc.
Save search Save the data entered on the search form for reusability.
Image1: Search form application.
Search Settings
Attributes to define the search form (filter) settings (Alignment, Width, Criteria, etc).
Figure1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes: Empty Search - Select Yes, to display all the records. (including empty (blank) search fields) Search Criteria - Allows to use the commands SQL AND or "OR" in the search criteria; Horizontal Alignment- Define the position to align the search form horizontally; Margins - Define the search form margins ; Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option. Keep Values - When enbaled the values of the last filter are saved and displayed when the user return the search screen. Preserver fields and Orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form. Table Width - Define the search form HTML width value. Use Iframe - When enbaled it displays the search form and results in the same window , in two FRAMES, one above of the other. Initial State - When enbaled it displays initially the filter with grid inside of the located iframe below the filter. This option is associate To use Iframe. Iframe Height - Height in pixels of the serach form results iframe. This option is associate To use Iframe. Case Sensitive - Considers Case Sensitive.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Search Criteria
Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the filter options. To select options click on one option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on "Turn On / Off" button. Buttons: Turn On/Off - Enable or Disable the field or selected option. All - Mark all fields or options. None - Unmark all fields or options.
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously.
Figure1: Toolbar Interface.
Attributes: Toolbar (top / bottom) - Select the buttons that are displayed in the search toolbar. Use the arrows on the right side of the button selection box to order the toolbar buttons.
Buttons Settings
Attributes: Access Keys - Define the access keys shortcuts.
Options
Figure3: Options Interface.
Attributes: Buttons Position(Top/Bottom) - Positioning of the buttons on the Top and Bottom toolbars.
Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save filter in the Search application, so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added. With this feature is possible to save searches by user login.
Figure1: Save Criteria Interface.
Figure2: Save Criteria Interface.
Log
Sql
This module is used to edit the Search application SQL.
Image1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes: SQL Select Statement - Shows the SQL Select statement that is being used. SQL Preparation - Allows to execute a SQL command (e.g:: procedure), before the execution of SQL Select Statement (if necessary). Connection - Displays connection name used for that application. Variable for Table - Variable name used for replacing the table name. Also inform the part of the table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable.
Image2:Variable for Table Interface.
Fields Variable - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each dynamically determined field, enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.
Security
Layout Overview
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Layout Settings
Header And Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Events Events
Image 1: Searchs Event Interface.
onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated. onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded. onRefresh- Occurs when the application is loaded. onValidate - Occurs when a validation is carried through. onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.
Fields Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("SEARCH->SELECT FIELDS).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to show specific seetings to each data type. These types are: Text Integer Currency Decimal Date Time Date and Time Select Double Select CheckBox Radio Text Auto-Complete Number Auto-Complete
New Field
Text
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width - Define the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Help Settings
Integer
Image1:Interface of General Configuration.
Atributos: Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Regional Settings - Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). Separator - Group Separator. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Currency
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field. Separator - Group Separator. Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
Field's Behavior
Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in
the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center
or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Decimal
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field. Separator - Group Separator. Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
Field's Behavior
Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just
functions if the filter will have at least one option.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Display - Allow to select the fielddisplay format. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Time
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Display- Allow to select the field display format. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date And Time
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Allow to select the display format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Select
General Settings
Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum field size SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of
values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
lookup value

Single Value
lookup settings.
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3
Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Double Select
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings
Interface.
Attributes: Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). Label Search - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Checkbox
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Lookup Value

Single Value
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description
1 2 4 8 16
Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Radio
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

Single column Radio
Lookup Value

Attributes : Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.
Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Help Settings
AUTO-COMPLETE NUMBER
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Figure1: Settings Interface
Attributes: Application Code - Determine the application name. It can be renamed through the main menu. Description - This field can be used to describe the application objectives. Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. Edit Project - Allows other users of the group edit the application. Timeout- Execution timeout in seconds. Zero assume the PHP default value. HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a project documentation page. Use Enter to tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Figure2: Error Settings Interface .
Attributes: Error Position - Error Position in the application. Values: right, left, above and below.> Show the Error Title in the application - Display the error message in the application. Show the Error Title in the field - Display the error message in thefield. Error Title - Error message Title in the application. >Script Error - Display script information where the error occurred. SQL Error - Show the SQL command in the error. Debug Mode - To run the application in debug mode, showing all SQL commands used in that application.
Navigation
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Link
Used to link the Search form with Form applications. There are two link types available in a Search: Application - Used to link to a Form application. Next to each record an icon link to a Form application. Capture - Used to get a value from a Grid application record to the field. is displayed to
Image1: New Link Menu
Select the link type.
Image2: Linking between Applications-Link Type Interface.
Link a Search with a Form application. The screen bellow displays all applications available in the project.
Image3: LinkbetweenApplications - Application List Interface.
In Image4 the Search fields must be associated with the Form fields.
Image4: LinkbetweenApplications - Parameters Interface .
In the screen below, Link Properties enter the link attributes.
Link Properties: Link Operation Mode - Define how the linked Form will be displayed. "Open in the same Window" - Open the linked application in the same window. "Open in another Window" - Open the linked application in another window. "Open in Iframe" - Open the form in the same window, but in a different frame(Below). "Open in Parent" - Open the form in the same window, but in the frame where is calling the Search. "Modal" - Open the Form in a Modal window. Form Property Enable or Disable buttons in the target Form application.
Create and displays an icon beside the field. The icon allows to retrieve the field a value from a Grid Application record.
Image6: Grid Search with link of type capture in the field.
Select a Grid application.
Image8:Application List Interface. Image9 displays the parameters definition. It shows which fields or variables should receive parameters to execute the Grid. The parameters options are:
Fixed - Use the text box to informa a fixed value or a variable. Empty - Choose this option to pass no value to the Grid.
Image9: Parameter definition Interface
Image10: Links created.
Actions Properties Link Delete Editing the link properties. Edit a Link Delete a link
In the link properties you can modify the link to modal.
Image11: Link properties
Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Report Pdf Applications Overview

Report PDF application.
This application is used to format PDF files, it is possible to build PDF files by defining each fields position on the generated report. This application type is based on SELECT statements.
Picture1: PDF Report in action.
Report Settings
Attributes: PDF Orientation - Define the report page orientation: Landscape or Portrait. Type: Records per Page: Used to print a record on a single page. Records per Line: Used to display the records as a conventional grid. PDF measure unit - Unit used in printing format-: points, millimeters, centimeters and counts. PDF format - Output print (paper) size. PDF Destination: Send the output to de selected destination: Browser: Open the pdf file immediately on a browser. Ex.: myfile.pdf Download: Creates a link to download the file, in this case you must specify the filename. Server: The pdf files are stored on the server side specified by the path. Ex.:c:\folder\file.pdf Upper Margin - Define the pdf upper margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report. Bottom Margin - Define the pdf bottom margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report. Right Margin - Define the pdf right margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report. Left Margin - Define the pdf left margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report. Create Search - Generate a filter form displayed before running your pdf application. Page Amount - Set the amount of pages on the pdf report.
Amount of columns - Set the number of columns by page. Columns width - Set the columns width. Columns height - Set the columns height.
Font And Background
Here you can define some layout settings such as font, images, help rulers.
Font face - Font face for your pdf report. Text Font size - Font size. Text color - Text Color. Text font style - Bold, Italic, Underlined. Show ruler - A useful X & Y ruler will be displayed on you pdf to help you with the coordinates settings. Image - Background Image for your report. Width - Image width. Height - Image Height. Position X - Where, on X axis, the image will be position. Position Y - Where, on Y axis, the image will be position. To print - Print the file directly.
Sql
Figure1: Interface of SQL Configuration
SQL Select Statement - Displays the SQL select command. Tip: The user can use the SQL Builder for fast assembly of the command.
SQL Preparation - Enter the SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the application main select. Connection - Shows the connection name (database) that the application is using, this connection can be changed for another that has the same tables (SQL). Use Customized Message - Allows defining the message to be shown if the grid do not return a record (EOF). No Records Message - Message to be shown. Field associated to Use Customized Message. Font Face - Font name used, click on the icon and choose a font. Field associated to Use Customized Message. Font Size - Choose the font size. Field associated to Use Customized Message. Font color - Font color. Field associated to Use Customized Message. Variable for table - Table name variable.
Note: In the first field should be filled with the variable name. The second field must be filled with part of the table name to be replaced. Fields Variables - Variable to replace select field name.
Note: In the first field must be filled in the name of the variable in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.
Security
Pdf Layout Interface
Interface to define where each field is displayed on the PDF report. Attributes: Seq - Cell number. It is automatically set by the interface. Cell - Cell name. Pos X - Defines the field position, on X (horizontal) axis. Pos Y - Defines the field position, on Y (vertical) axis. Width - Cell's width. Alignment - Cell's Horizontal Alignment. Field - Data displayed on the cell.
Code
Use a set of commands to manipulate the pdf report.
The Report PDF application is based on the fpdf class. The class methods are available to the user as well macros listed in the table bellow. Use the object $pdf with the selected method, exemplo: $pdf>AcceptPageBreak(parameters); Click here to access the FDPF a documentation.
Method FPDF Macro ScriptCase Description AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break Accept an automatic page break. AddFont sc_pdf_add_font Add new font. AddLink sc_pdf_add_link Create internal link. AddPage sc_pdf_add_page Add new page. AliasNbPages sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages Define alias to page number. Cell sc_pdf_cell Print cell. Close sc_pdf_close: close the document. error sc_pdf_error Display error message. Footer sc_pdf footer. GetStringWidth sc_pdf_get_string_length Calculate string seize. GetX sc_pdf_get_x Returns X position. GetY sc_pdf_get_y Returns Y position . Header sc_pdf_header header. Image sc_pdf_image Puts an image on the page. Line sc_pdf_line Draws a line. Link sc_pdf_link Inserts link. Ln sc_pdf_ln ConImagethe line break. MultiCell sc_pdf_multi_cell print text with line break. Output sc_pdf_output Saves or send a document. PageNo sc_pdf_page_no Page number. Rect sc_pdf_rect Draws a rectangle. SetAuthor sc_pdf_set_author Define document author. SetAutoPageBreaksc_pdf_set_auto_page_break Activates/deactivates automatic page break. SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression Turns on/off page compression. SetCreator sc_pdf_set_creator Define document creator. SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode Define display mode. SetDrawColor sc_pdf_set_draw_color Define the color used to picture. SetFillColor sc_pdf_set_fill_color Define fill color. SetFont sc_pdf_set_font Define font settings. SetFontSize sc_pdf_set_font_size Define font size.
SetKeywords SetLeftMargin SetLineWidth SetLink SetMargins SetRightMargin SetSubject SetTextColor SetTitle SetTopMargin SetX SetXY SetY Text Write
sc_pdf_set_keywords sc_pdf_set_left_margin sc_pdf_set_line_width sc_pdf_set_link sc_pdf_set_margins sc_pdf_set_right_margin sc_pdf_set_subject sc_pdf_set_text_color sc_pdf_set_title sc_pdf_set_top_margin sc_pdf_set_x sc_pdf_set_xy sc_pdf_set_y sc_pdf_text sc_pdf_write
Set document keywords. Define left margin . Define line width. Set internal link. Define margins. Define right margin. Define subject. Define text color. Define document title. Define top margin. Define X position. Define XY position. Define Y position. Print string. Print characters string.
Positioning
Interface to define the field display sequence (use the arrows to set a field position).
Fields Fields
In this sessions is display toConfigureonly the grid selected in the menu "GRID - SELECT FIELDS ".
Field - field is possible to define the attributes. The edit page is re-loaded to display/configure each field specific attributes depending on field type.
Text
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type text it accepts letters, numbers and special characters. Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all lower case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select option is Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all word. HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags. Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Value M Start 1 Size 1
Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling
F C S SP MO BO TR
1 2 2 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books
8 16
Traveling Music
Multiple Lines Text
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type multiple lines text is basically a text box. Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all lower case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select option is Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all words. HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags. Width - Field width. Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Attributes :
Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in
bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Lookup
Value 1 2 4 8 16
Integer
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An integer type field accepts only integers. Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If No is selected the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative format of number are displayed.(See regional settings). Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Negative Sign- Define the character used to display negative values. Number negative format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Negative Color - Define a different font color to negative values.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Value - Attribute stored in the table. Delimiter - Define the character used to separated string values.
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed): Attributed Lookup
Value 1 2 4 8 16
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Use lookup in:
Grid
Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Decimal
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A decimal type field accepts decimal values. Label - Define the field title. Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero. Do Not Repeat Value - Skip repeated information displaying a field value only once. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field. To learn more about regional settings click here. Negative Color - Negative value's color. Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is R$ 125,500. Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example, a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a
database table (see lookup automatic).
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.
For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).
Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Currency
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field. To learn more about regional settings click here. Currency Format - Display field with currency format. Negative Color - Negative value's color. Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is R$ 125,500. Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed):
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Use lookup in:
Grid
Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Html Image
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An HTML IMAGE field is used for images processing. Image - Search images to display. Use the icons to select between scriptcase standard available images or upload an image from any directory. Border - Image border size. Width - Image width size. May be expressed in percent or pixels. Height - Image height size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.
Date
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2). SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field. To learn more about regional settings click here. Display - Format of the field display. Internal Format - Field format for database storage.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby
(two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Time
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Time is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2). SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.
For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in
Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Date And Time
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date and Time is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2). SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Values Format
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup


Single Value
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and
size. For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Image (database)
IMAGE (DATABASE)
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (Database) field process images stored in binary format. in the database. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Image height in pixels. Image width - Image width in pixels. Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Open in another window - Open the original image in another window. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Image (file Name)
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (File Name ) field process images. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Image height in pixels. Image width - Image width in pixels. Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Open in another window - Open the original image in another window. SubFolder - SubFolder where the files are stored. Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept in the server before being deleted. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Document (database)
Image1: Field General Settings Interface
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A Document (Database) field creates a link to each document in the database. Display Icon - Display the file type icon. File Name - Field that contains document's file name, it will be stored on the database. SQLType - Determine the field type in database.
Attributes: Data Type - Define Document (File Name) field creates a link to each document. Display Icon - Display the file type icon. File Name - Field that contains document's file name, it will be stored on the database. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Credit Card Number
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. A Card field is formatted and validate accordingly. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use
this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary

Single Value
E-mail
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An E-mail field display an icon linking to outlook. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.
Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary

Single Value
Url
Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. An URL field display an linking icon. Other Page - Open link in another page. SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in
curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary

Single Value
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books - Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 Lookup Description Sports Movies
4 8 16
Books Traveling Music
Bar Code
General Settings
Barcode
Values Format interface.
Attributes: Type - Type of bar code. Output - Image format output. DPI - Image quality. Thickness - Image height. Resolution - Resolution of the image. Rotation - Rotate image. Font - Barcode text font.
Text - Text to designate the barcode.
Display Settings
Display Settings interface.
Attributes: Font Style - Used to select the font style that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Style of the font - Style of the text font displayed in the pdf (Bold, Italic, Underline). Number of characters - Number of characters to be displayed. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or bottom). Background Image - Background image Field. Line Break - Allow line breaks. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background Color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Width - Sets the title width. Height (px) - Sets the title height in pixels. Title Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right or center). Title Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or bottom). Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
New Field Subselect
New SubSelect Field

This resource is very useful when you need to make a master-detail report, for example Categories and Products. You must create a new "Subselect" field.
Step1:Create a new field.
Step2:Choose the "Subselect" type. For this field type we can set up the following parameters: Increment - The space between two lines. Connection - Detail is stored on another database Table - To write the SQL instruction to retrieve the data. Subselect - SQL example SELECT ProdName, PriceUnit, UnitsStored FROM adm_products where categoryID = {categoyid} Note the parameter {categoryid} passed.
Now, on the fields list you can expand the SubSelect Field to see it?s 'fields'.
Events Events
If you need do something more specific on you reports, you can program it, using events. For example if you want to sum two fields and move this result to another one, before printing the record, just edit the event OnRecord and write a code similar to this: {field_c} = {field_b} + {field_a};
Here you are free to program PHP, just remember the character { } , around the field name to make reference the local variables, using [ ], you are making reference to global variables. Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application. onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated. onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded. onRecord - This event is executed before printing each record. onHeader - This event is executed immediately before printing the header. Use this event, for example, to print a calculated value in the header. onFooter - This event is used to show some calculated value on the footer. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Log
Search Settings
Define all Search form attributes.
Figure1: Search Settings Interface. Attributes Empty Search - Yes, display all records, if search fields are empty. No, no register is displayed. Search Criteria - Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the search criteria to be used. Horizontal Alignment - Define the search form horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment - Define the search form vertical alignment. Margins - Define the search form position (margins). Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option. AND or OR appears in the search form for selection. Keep Values - When activated the values of the last search are kept and shown when the user return the search screen. Preserver fields and Orders - Allows the end user to select form order. Table width - Define the search form HTML width value.
Table Width Unit - Unit used in width measurement. Use Iframe - Display search form and the search results in the same browser window, in two FRAMES, one above the other. Initial State - Display search first the grid in the iframe positioned below the search. Or displays just the search . This option is associated to Using Iframe. Iframe Height - Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search is displayed. This option is associated to Using Iframe. Case Sensitive - Define the search operation mode.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Search Criteria
Allows to define search options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the search options. To select options click on the option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on "Turn On / Off" button. Buttons: Turn On/Off - Enable or Disable the field or selected option. All - Mark all fields or options. None - Unmark all fields or options. Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows do not display the criteria beside the field.
Toolbar
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes: Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the filter toolbars and the buttons position. Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons Settings
Image2: Buttons Settings.
Attributes: Button - Button name. Label - Define the label displayed on the button. Hint - Define a hint in the button. Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Rules Edit
Save criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles. It creates the option Save criteria in the Search application, so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added, with this feature is possible to save searches by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface.
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface.
Layout Overview
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Display Settings
Layout Settings
Header
FOOTER
Events
In ScriptCase was incorporated the concept of Events in the applications, making possible a more standard development. It was also created a documentation system in the ScriptCase to display the ScriptCase macros that have reference to each selected event. onScriptInit - This event is executed once, before the execution of the main select of the application. In this scope, normally, are executed the macros that modify the select, such as: sc_select_field, sc_select_order, sc_select_where(add) and etc. onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded. onValidate - Occurs when a validation is performed. onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.
Fields Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("GRID->SELECT FIELDS).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to show specific seetings to each data type. These types are:
New Field
Text
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same label used on the Grid- This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width- Field Size. SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
Attributes: Convert Letter- Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase, all in small letters, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase all words. Submit on OnChange - Allow when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allow when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Integer
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label on the Gridl -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. SQL Type - Define the SQL Type of the field.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Regional Settings - Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). Separator - Group Separator.
Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Decimal
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field. Separator - Group Separator.
Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Currency
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field. Separator - Group Separator.
Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field. Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super,
top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Date
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration.
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Exibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Time
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Hour. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Exhibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Show Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Show Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date And Time
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes: Exhibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Show Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Show Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection
of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Select
Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers and characters. Search Label- Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of
values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
lookup value

Single Value
lookup settings.
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3
Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Double Select
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). Label Search - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Width - Allow to determine the field width. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Checkbox
Attributes: Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object. Label Search - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Lookup Value

Single Value
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43.
Default - Selected value by default. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling
16
Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Lookup Value
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return
value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes:
Help Settings
Radio
Attributes: Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it. Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

Single column Radio
Lookup Value

Attributes : Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item.
Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Grid Fields
Attributes: Data type - Search Fields is a new resource which allow the selection of the fields that will be part of the grid body of the search. Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Sorting
Attributes: Tipo do Dados - "Ordenao dos Campos" um novo recurso que permite de sejam selecionados os ordem campos ( clausula ORDER BY) que fazem parte do corpo da GRID da Consulta. Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Height - Allow to determine the field height.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes: Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility. Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field - Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Image1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes: Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Width - Allow to determine the field width. Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.
Help Settings
Define the common ScriptCase applications attributes. See below the attributes description:
Attributes: Application code - Application code determinated in the moment of the application creation, this code can be renamed through the main menu. Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives. Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored. Application images - Specific images used by this application. Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application. Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application. Script Error - Displays the script and the line where the error occurred. SQL Error - Displays the SQL command which originated the error. Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Command in the moment of its using.
Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace. Edit Project -Allows other group users to edit the application. Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP. HelpCase Link -Associate a this application to a project documentation page.
Navigation
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Programming Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Calendar Applications Overview
Calendar
A calendar is an organizer application for social, religious, commercial, or administrative purposes. The main concept is defined time periods, typically days, weeks, months, and years.
Calendar for Month

This option shows all days in a selected month. The record title is displayed in the day slot.
Image1: Calendar for a month application interface.
Calendar for Day

This option shows all hours in a selected day. The record title is displayed in the hour line.
Image2: >Calendar for a day application interface.
Calendar for Week

This option shows all days in a selected week. The record title is displayed in the hour line and day columm cell.
Image3:Calendar for a week application interface.
Creating or Editing the record.

Upon selecting day and hour, double click in calendar to open the form to insert a new schedule.
Image4:Editing record in calendar application.
Settings Settings
Use this option to define the application.
Image1: Settings Interface.
Attributes: Ajax - Allows to activate the use of ajax resources (Ajax Events, Auto-complete text, etc.) in the generated application.
Horizontal Alignment - Allows to define the application horizontal alignment in the page. Margins - Defines the application margins (up, down, right and left). Table Width - Application width value. The ScriptCase applications are generated in the HTML standard, and are organized in tables, lines and cells. This parameter defines the most external application table width. Table Width Unit- Measurement unit used in table width defined in the previous item: percentage, pixel or automatic. When using percentage is generated a HTML with the format <TABLE WIDITH="70%"> (as an example with 70 as the field width input). In pixel, the generated html to the same application has the tag <TABLE WIDITH="70px">. For the automatic option the '%' or 'px' is omitted and the browser will automatically dimension the table. Width - Iframe form width. * Height - Iframe form height. * * The form application that insert a new schedule in calendar application, open in modal iframe on top of calendar.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options: 1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name. 2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application. 3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the dropdown box. 4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications 4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record (Addition mode). 4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record (Edition mode). 4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited. 4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field. 4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is selected it will work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key. 4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This option allows you to set a default value to the field. 4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. 5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages, which are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks. 6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
It provides unique key validation at web server side.
Image 1: Unique Fields Interface.
Toolbar
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes: Navigation - Displays the buttons used to navigate on the form (first, previous, next, last, exit ). The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. Update - Displays the buttons used to modify recorded information on the form (insert, update, delete) . The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Buttons Settings
Attributes: Button - Button name.
Label - Defines the label displayed on the button. Hint - Defines a hint to the button. Access Key - Allows to define fast access keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image3: Options Interface.
Attributes: JS Formatting - Use automatic filled format . Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and an icon is displayed in the block title bar linking to the help page. General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linking to the help page.
Log
Sql
Define the attributes relative to the connection to the table used by the form. Define primary key, filters and ordinances for the form.
Image1: SQL Settings
Interface
Select primary key fields - In this function it is displayed a combobox object with an asterisks that indicate what are the fields that are SQL table primary key fields . In the majority of cases, the Scriptcase identifies it. For cases that are not identifiable by the Scriptcase the user must use the buttons to select the field as key, note: On/Off Button - Select/unselect the field as primary key displaying an asterisk at its left side. All Button - Defines all fields as primary key. None - Defines that no field is primary key (unselect all). Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the process. Ordinance Buttons - Allows to order the primary key fields. To order click on the field and use the arrows.
Where Condition - Enter the WHERE to retrieve the records to edit. Order By - Enter the ORDER BY clause to determine the order that the records are displayed. When the navigation is used by default, the order is determinated by the primary key.
Connection -Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be replaced by another that have the same tables (SQL). Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - Fields to allow to be replaced part of the table name defined in the select, before the execution.
Note: In the first field enter the variable name. In the second field enter the part of the table name to be replaced.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the filter does not respect this setting.
Procedures
Configures a form application to use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) for adding, updating, and excluding information. When not configured to use procedures the default is to use Scriptcase standards for the commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE. See below step-by-step implementation for Stored Procedure Database Insertion.
Image1: Stored Procedures Interface
1 - Mark the option: I want to use Procedure to do INSERT. Enter the procedure name and the
amount of parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Define the fields that reference to the Stored Procedure parameters and each parameter type (input or
output). Click on the button save to complete this process.
Image3: Passing values to the Stored Procedure.
Javascript
Attributes: Choose the object - In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application, as the object form form. Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write the Javascript code. See the available events: onclick - Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur - Occurs when the objects lose focus. See example onChange - Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. See example onFocus - Occurs always that the object gains focus. See example onMouseOver - Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. See example onMouseOut - Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field. See example
Edit Javascript
Selecting the object and its event, then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events, for example: nm_reload_form(); that do a reload on the form.
OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value. if(document.F1.sex[0].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = false; document.F1.aux_maternity .style.background='FFFFFF' } if(document.F1.sex[1].checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = true; document.F1.aux_maternity.style.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index. OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field weekly_hour_job when it loose focus. if (document.F1.tp_folha[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed."); document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = ""; document.F1.weekly_hour_job.focus(); } onChange examples: When modify the Salary of an employee and go out of the field, will occur an onChange, in this moment we use advantage to check if the position is gardener. if (document.F1.salary.value > 5000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener');
} After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the Select: type payment_way, the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel. if(document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == 'avista') {
document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value; } if (document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 2; } if (document.F1.payway [document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60/90') { document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 3; } onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color, font color, etc.) when the mouse is over the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field. document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
Dependencies
A resource to allow to link related tables, defining a dependency between tables. For example, the table of orders and items, removing a record from the table of orders, all its items also have to be removed. See an example using this resource below.
1- First define a new dependence. In this example we will create an dependency between
adm_suppliers_products (Dependent table) with the table adm_supplier (Actual application). Click on the button new dependency to begin.
2 - Select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related to the father and child table. In
this example only one field is related : the supplier code.
3 - Select the keys (linking fields) : adm_suppliers -> supplierID - adm_suppliers_products ->supplierID.
4 - Click on the button generate Scripts to define the dependence rule.
5 - Select the script type to be generated, the position of the ScriptCase in the Event (onBeforeDelete).
Click on the button Generate to complete this process.
Security
CAPTCHA
Fields Overview
This interface allows to inform the validation rules and formatting of each form field. The configuration of the form fields is done by clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left side of the Calendar folder.
Image1: List of fields. The system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where the field Data type is attributed by ScriptCase according to SQL table definition. For each Data type a diferent list of characteristics is presented. Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type, the formatting should be set according to the chosen type.
Text
General Settings
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field
Password field
Values Format
Attributes: Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase all words Minimum Size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts. Maximum Size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts. Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will accept any character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows to select, add or remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
Font - Font type used to display the lookup.
Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.
Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
Attributes: Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase all words. Minimum size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts. Maximum size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts. Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will accept any character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows to select, add or remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes:
Help Settings
Integer
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only integer numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Decimal
General Settings
Interface.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.* Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign. Number negative format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value. Show a calculator - Displays a calculator.
Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.*
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super,
top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Currency
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters, numbers, characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date
General Settings
Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Time
General Settings
Image1:
General Settings Interface.
Attributes: Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Image (database)
General Settings
Attributes: Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Note that the images are stored in the database as text. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Max File Size - Defines maximum field length. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings).
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image (file name) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection).
Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Document (database)
DOCUMENT(Database)
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document it creates a link for each existent document in the database. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. File Name - Field that contains the document file name. File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Attributes:
General Settings
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Credit Card Number

General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes:
Help Settings
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and is used to validate information according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Defines the application field type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Values Formats
Figure2:
DATABASE VALUE
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
E-mail
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the
Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Url
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of access. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX
technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors.
Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive
parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
DATABASE VALUE
GRID LOOKUP
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the field.
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a sliding window. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields.
NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
lookup value

Single Value
lookup settings.
Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Value M F S M SP Start 1 1 2 2 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2
Movies Books Traveling
MO BO TR
3 3 3
2 2 2
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. Implicit Value Item Description
1 2 4 8 16
Sports Movies Traveling Books Music
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
Attributes: Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more options (by marking a box). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Lookup Value

Single Value
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13.
AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Radio
Use radio object in the field.
General Settings
Attributes: Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information (from the list shown). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

Single column Radio
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Text Auto-complete
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value must be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.
Text field
Password field
Values Format
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted:
All - Accepts all characters.
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value must be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically
read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
VALUES FORMAT
DATABASE VALUE
Edition Lookup
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Image
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to insert in the field an image. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image - Search the image that will must be shown. Choose it by using the icon Choose image that have standard images or by using the icon Upload image that allows the choice of any image. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Label
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just an output. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Text - Box where wil be informed the text that will be shown beside the field. Use to reload - Transforms the text that was informed in the property Text, defined above, into a link that reloads the form when it is clicked. Positioning - Allow to position the form in the chosen block.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Html Editor
General Settings
Toolbar
Attributes: Properties : Position - Toolbar position in the HTML Editor. Alignment - Button alignment in the toolbar. Status - Hides or displays the status bar. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar:
Top or Bottom. Amount (Toolbar lines) - Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor. Button layout - Define the toolbar display settings. Preview - Preview the toolbar display settings defined.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Theme
General Settings
Localization
General Settings
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes: Data Type - Field data type. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Barcode
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Help Settings
Layout Overview
Application attributes and formatting resources such as visualization schemas, organizing fields in blocks, define the values and the header format between others. Pages Blocks Colors Schema Header & Footer
Pages
An application page can be deifined as block container. For each application it is created a page with default name pag1 . It is possible to create more pages. The pages are shown in the application in tabs mode, where each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Pages settings
interface.
See below an application example using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2).
Image2: Application using pages resources.
The application has a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of table fields (more than 20 for example). An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3:Page Settings Interface.
To include a new page, just fill the boxex above the button Insert, in the first field fill the page name and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon. To delete a page, just click on the delete button. Attributes: Font Name - Select the font in the existing list, or enter a font name to be used in the application. Font Size - Enter the font size. Select font Color- Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the selected text color. Select background Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the selected text background color. Non selected font Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the non selected tab font color. Non selected background Color -Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the non selected tab background color.
Blocks

Add New Block

Edit Block
Layout Settings
Layout Settings
Figure1: Layout Settings Interface. Define the application layout. Attributes: Header Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application header. Footer Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application footer. Theme - Choose from the available themes. The application visual mode (color, fonts, etc.) is loaded.
Header & Footer
HEADER
FOOTER
Events Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application. onInit - This event runs when the application is loading. onRefresh - This event runs to reload the application page onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter) depending on application. onBeforeInsert - This event runs after the insertion. onAfterInsert - This event runs after the insertion. onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record. onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record. onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion. onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion. onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to another, clicking on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.) Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Ajax Events
optional.
2 -Enter
Buttons Buttons
New Button
Deleting a button
Javascript Button

Button Display Mode
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Icon - Button display icon. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image. Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint - Defines a hint message. Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message, leave this field blank. CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor. Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Deleting a button
Php Button

Button Display Mode
Code
Image2: Php
Interface.
Deleting a button
Link Button

Button Display Mode
The link button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

Image3: Link Type
Interface.
Interface - Field.
Image8: Link/Form Properties
Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link. Open in the same window - Show the application in the same browser window, exiting the search and going to the form. Open in other window - Open another window to show the application Open in a Iframe - Show the application in the same in the same window that the search, below of search an Iframe is created to display the application. Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Linking Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Form Properties - Select the buttons that will be shown.
Deleting a button
Define ScriptCase applications attributes.
Image1: Application Settings Interface.
Attributes: Application code - Application code determined in the moment of the application creation, this code can be renamed through the main menu. Description - This field can be used to describe the application objectives. Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored. Application Images - Specific images used by this application. Localization - Generated application language used, all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language. Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application. Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application. Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace. Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application. Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP. Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message. HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application. Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application.
Message Title - Text used in title line as label. Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface. Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom. Show error title in the application - Allows to show the title line of the error message. Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field. Error title - Error message title in the application. Error Script - Displays the script and line where the error occurs. Error SQL - Displays SQL command that originated the error. Debug Mode - Runs the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands. Ajax error output - Opens a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode. Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes: Exit URL - Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication. Close Window - When exiting the application, close the browser window. Redirecting URL - URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu. Redirecting Variable - Variable name, which is used to store the URL of the current application. Message after insert - Message to show after the record insertion. The message is displayed when navigating to other page. Message after update - Message to show after the record update. The message is displayed when navigating to other page. Message after insertion - Message to be shown after the insertion of a register. Will occur the navigation to other page and the message will be shown, soon below of the message will appear the button OK that when is clicked return to the form. Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing. Return After inserting - Defines if the form will return to edit the inserted record or a new record can be entered and added.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Synchronize Table
This process will compare the application fields definitions of the and the table fields definition in the database.
Changes in database table as an update, inclusion, or exclusion, or a change in the data type, is displayed as in the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table Interface
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
Used to link the application with other applications of the following types: Search, Form, Control, Menu and Tab. There are three types of links available: Application - Used to link form to other application. This link type is associated to events. Field - Used to link our form through a link Capture - Creates an icon to any other type of application.
beside the field inside the form. Displays a search application.
In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent link or create a new link.
Image1: Links.
Creating Links Select the link type : Application, Field or Capture.
Image2:Link between applications Interface.
This link type is associated to events. Application List shows the applications. Select the application to link and clink in Continue >>.
Image3: Link between application Interface.
Below, Parameters Definition , at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to receive parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value, there are three options, they are: Field - Enter a the field used for passing values. Value - Enter a fixed value to be passed. Empty - No value is passed to the field.
In the window below, Link Properties enter the link attributes.
Image5:Link Properties Interface.
Attributes: Redirecting after insert - Navigates for the application linked when adding information. Redirecting after Update - Navigates for the application linked when updting information.. Form property - Allows to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar.
Creates an icon beside the field in the search form. Opens another window showing a search application.
Linking Type (below) shows that when it is selected the link Capture, application fields is displayed. Selected the field that is used for the link.
a combobox with the
Image6: Parameter Definition Interface .
Below, Application List shows the search applications. Select the application to link and click on Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface.
Below, in Parameters Definition, at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to receive parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value, there are three options, they are: Fixed - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter. Empty- No value is passed as a parameter.
Recovering the field value - Selected the search application field to link object.
Image8: Parameter Definition Interface.
Attributes
Methods
button:
Figure 8: Events.
Libraries
Scriptcase Macros Scriptcase Macros
Scriptcase has macros and special variables that allow the user to manipulate events, buttons, applications, security control, manipulate with dates, etc. Follows a table of all macros and special variables from ScriptCase, including the list of applications that works for each one.
MACROS AND SPECIAL VARIABLES
Shows
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir") sc_block_display (Block_Name, on/off) sc_field_color ("Field", "Color") sc_field_disabled ("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter") sc_field_display ({My_Field}, on/off) sc_field_init_off (Field1, Field2,...) sc_field_readonly ({Field}, on/off) sc_field_style ({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight") sc_format_num ({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb", "Side_Currency_Symb") sc_form_show 'on' or 'off' sc_set_focus ('Field') This macro allows the application to display customized messages. This macro dynamically show/hide the fields of a specific block. This macro changes the color of a determined field text. This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it. This macro dynamically display or not a specific field. This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load. This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to '"Read-Only" This macro allolws to modify dinamically the grid field style. This macro its used to format numerical values.
This macro dynamically show or not the form. This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
Security
sc_apl_status ("Application", "Status") sc_reset_apl_conf ("Application", "Property") sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_menu_delete sc_reset_menu_disable This macro Activate/Deactivate the applications at user level. This macro deletes all the modifications effected by "sc_apl_conf" macro. This macro deletes all the application security status variables. This macro restores a menu item structure. (removed by the macro "sc_menu_delete"). This macro its used to enable a menu item structure. (disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable").
Filter
sc_where_filter This macro its used to save the where clause content generated through the filter form.
Barcode
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco
SQL
sc_begin_trans ("Connection") sc_change_connection ("Old_Connection", "New_Connection") sc_commit_trans ("Connection") sc_error_continue ("Event") This macro starts a set of transations in the database. This macro dynamically change the application connections. This macro effective a set of transations in the database. This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for an event. This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the exclusion of a record. This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the addition of a record. This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the update of a record. This macro execute SQL commands passed as parameter or a SQL command in the SQL field action type. This macro executes a SELECT command stored in the second parameter and returns the data in a variable. This macro erases the changes made using "sc_change_connection".
sc_error_delete
sc_error_insert
sc_error_update
sc_exec_sql ("SQL Command", "Connection") sc_lookup (Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection") sc_reset_change_connection
sc_rollback_trans ("Connection") This macro discards a set of transations in the data base. sc_select (dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection") sc_select_field ({Field}) sc_select_order ("Field") sc_select_where (add) sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable) sc_sql_protect (Value, "Type", "Connection") sc_where_current sc_where_orig vari?veis database Database Variables This macro executes the commands passed in the second parameter and returns the dataset in a variable. This macro modify dynamically a field that will be recovered in the grid. This macro modify dynamically the grids "ORDER BY" clause field. This macro adds dynamically a condition to the grid WHERE clause. This macro it used protect the field/variable against "SQL injection". This macro protects the value passed as parameter according with the used database. This macro its used to make a reference of the where clause currently used. This macro saves the where clause content of the original application select. Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
Date
sc_date (Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y) sc_date_conv ({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format") sc_date_dif ({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2") sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option) sc_date_empty ({Field_Date}) This macro calculates and returns increments and decrements using dates. This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format. This macro calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the result in days. This macro calculates the difference between two dates returning the amount of days, months and years. This macro checks if a date field its empty retuning a boolean.
Control
sc_add_line_tit (Title1, Colspan, Align, Background Color, Font Size, Font Color, Font Type); sc_ajax_javascript ( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter")) sc_alert ("Message") sc_apl_conf ("Application", "Property", "Value") sc_calc_dv (Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type) sc_changed ({Field_Name}) sc_confirm ("Message") sc_decode ({My_Field}) sc_encode ({My_Field}) sc_error_exit (URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target") This macro add lines on the top of the Grid title, before it starts. This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods in form/control events This macro shows a Javascript alert message screen. This macro modify the application execution property. This macro calculate verify digits. This macro returns "true" if the field name have been changed. This macro shows a Javascript confirm screen. This macro returns the encrypted field or variable to its original value. This macro returns the field or variable with the content encrypted. This macro Interrupts the application execution if there are error messages generated by the macro "sc_error_message". This macro generate an error message. This macro forces the application exit. This macro assign the properties of a field to a javascript variable. This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used. This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used. This macro returns the application theme name. This macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in groupby lines. This macro loads images passed as parameter to use in the application. This macro its used to "include" PHP routines. This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries. This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label. This macro returns the language and regional settings. This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications. This macro will add a register into the log table. This macro returns what was inserted in the "description" field of the log table in an array format. This macro its used to send e-mails.
sc_error_message ("Text") sc_exit (Option) sc_getfield ('myField') sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_groupby_label ("My_Field") sc_image (Image01.jpg) sc_include ("File", "Source") sc_include_lib ("Lib1", "Lib2", ...) sc_label ({My_Field}) sc_language sc_link (Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width) sc_log_add ("action", "description") sc_log_split ({description})
sc_mail_send (SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment) sc_make_link (Application, Parameters) sc_master_value ('Object', Value) sc_redir (Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error) sc_reset_global ([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...) sc_seq_register
This macro is used to create a string with the link data to another application. This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application. This macro its used to redirects to other application or URL. This macro delete session variables received as parameter. This macro provide the register sequential number.
sc_set_global ($variable_01) or ({My_Field}) sc_set_language ('String Language') sc_set_regional ('String Regional') sc_set_theme ('String Theme') sc_site_ssl sc_trunc_num ({My_Field}, Decimal_Number) sc_url_exit (URL) sc_warning 'on' or 'off' sc_zip_file ("File", "Zip") vari?veis report pdf Report PDF Variables vari?veis totaliza??o Totalling Variables vari?veis totalizacao(quebras) Totalling Variables (group by)
This macro its used to register session variables. This macro allows to dynamically change the application language. This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings. This macro its used to dinamically define the application themes. This macro verifies if its been used a safe/secure site. (https protocol) This macro its used to set the number of decimals. This macro modifies the application exit URL. This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control. This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a file list and/or directories. Page numbers variables used in Report PDF Variables that contains all the totals (general and for grouping). Breaking totals variables.
Buttons
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_delete sc_btn_display ("Button_Name","on/off") sc_btn_insert sc_btn_new sc_btn_update This macro returns "true" when the "copy" button is selected in a form. This macro returns "true" when the "Delete" button is selected in a form. This macro activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time. This macro returns "true" when the "Add" button is selected in a form. This macro returns "true" when the "Add New" button is selected in a form. This macro returns "true" when the "Save" button is selected in a form.
PDF
sc_set_pdf_name "sc_my_file_name.pdf" This macro will change the grid's exported files name.
Menu
sc_appmenu_add_item ("String Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target") sc_appmenu_create ("String Menu_Name") sc_appmenu_exist_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item") sc_appmenu_remove_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item") sc_appmenu_reset ("String Menu_Name") sc_appmenu_update_item ("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target") sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1) sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1) sc_menu_item sc_script_name This Macro adds dinamically an item to the menu.
This macro dynamically creates a menu item. This macro checks if there is a menu item. This macro removes dynamically a menu item. This macro reset the array used in the dinamically creation of a menu application. This macro updates a menu item.
This macro remove items of the menu structure. This macro deactivate menu structure items. This macro Identifies the application selected in a menu items. This macro identifies the application that was selected in the menu itens.
sc_add_line_tit(Title1, Colspan, Align, Background Color, Font Size, Font Color, Font Type);
This macro must be called on a Grid onScriptInit event only. The "align, background color, font size, font color, font type" parameters are optional. If left empty the Title Line settings will be used. In align parameter you can use these options: Parameter Description *If you use this macro, you must disable Select Column option in C Center the Toolbar. R Right L Left You can add many lines as you want, just repeat the macro for each line.
Macro Scope
sc_ajax_javascript( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter"))
This macro allows the execution of methods javascript called from events in form/control applications. This macro receive two parameters: a required one that recive a parameter as string with the Javascript method name on it and an optional that recive a parameter as an array with javascript method parameters on it. This macro is only valid in applications with AJAX support. Examples: Ex. 1: Method javascript without parameters: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName');
Ex. 2: Method javascript with a paramenter: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("paramameter"));
Ex. 3: Method javascript with two paramenters: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("param1","param2"));
Macro Scope Control Form onBlur onChange Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete
onClick onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onAfterInsert onValidateFailure onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_message("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir")
Esta macro permite que a aplica??o exiba mensagens customiz?veis, com seu uso restrito aos eventos do formul?rio/controle quando se faz uso no eventos AJAX. Esta macro s? ? valida em aplica??es com suporte a AJAX.
Param?tros Mensagem
T?tulo String de Parametros da mensagem
Descri??o Texto que ser? exibido no corpo da mensagem. Este parametro ? de preenchimento obrigat?rio. Texto que ser? exibido no t?tulo da mensagem. Se n?o preenchido o t?tulo da mensagem n?o ser? exibido. Par?metro de formata??o da mensagem. Ex.: modal=Y&button=Y&button_label=Ok&redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
Os detalhes deste par?metro est?o detalhados na tabela2. String de Nesta propriedade podem ser definidos os valores para a aplica??o de parametros do redirecionamento.Esta propriedade funciona apenas se a propriedade redir for Redirecionamento informada. Os parametros devem ser informados no seguinte formato: parametro=valor;parametro=valor. Ex.: customer_id=ALFKI;customer_name=ALBERT FRANCINET Tabela2: String de Par?metros da mensagem
Propriedade Descri??o modal Flag para exibi??o da mensagem em modal timeout Tempo em segundos para esconder mensagem. Se n?o informado mensagem ser? exibida indefinidamente. Esta propriedade s? funciona se a propriedade button n?o estiver habilitada. button Exibe bot?o dentro da mensagem. O seu funcionamento padr?o ? fechar a mensagem. Caso seja habilitado o redirecionamento, ap?s fechar a mensagem a aplica??o ser? redirecionada.
Valores Y ou N modal=Y
Segundos timeout=5
Exemplo
Y ou N
button=Y
button_label Label do bot?o. Esta op??o s? funciona caso a propriedade button habilidata top Valor para posicionamento da mensagem em pixels left Valor para posicionamento da mensagem em pixels width Valor para largura da mensagem em pixels height Valor da altura da mensagem em pixels redir Nome da aplica??es ou URL para redirecionamento. Esta propriedade funciona apenas caso a propriedade button esteja habilitada. redir_target Target para url de redicionamento. Esta propriedade funciona apenas quando a propriedade redir est? habilitada. show_close Flag para exibi??o do bot?o de fechar mensagem localizado na barra de titulo. Esta propriedade quando ativa for?a a exibi??o da barra de titulo mesmo que o parametro titulo esteja vazio. body_icon Flag para exibi??o do icone do corpo da mensagem. Mesmo quando esta propriedade est? ativa a exibi??o do icone depende da configura??o do Tema (Esquema de exibi??o) usado na aplica??o. Ex. 01
String
button=Y&button_label=OK
Apenas numeros Apenas numeros Apenas numeros Apenas numeros String
top=300 left=200 width=320 height=30 button=Y&redir=form_employees.php
String
redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
Y ou N
show_close=Y
Y ou N
body_icon=N
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "timeout=0");
Macro Scope Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onFocus Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate
onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_alert("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript alert message screen. Ex. 1: sc_alert("This is an alert message!!");
Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onValidate
sc_apl_conf("Application", "Property", "Value")
This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a Form will start in insert mode, or a Grid starts by filter, etc. This macro must be used by one application to modify the properties of another application.
Properties for Form applications Property start insert Value new on/off Description Forces the form to start in the insert mode in order to add new records. Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "add new" button to allow the addtion of new records. Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "save" button on the form. Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "delete" button on the form. Dinamically hides a field. Dinamically shows a field. Dinamically set the "readonly" attribute in order to select the field. Forces the number of lines for each page (only for form of multiple records). Forces the number of lines for insert (only for form of multiple records).
update on/off delete on/off field_display_off field field_display_on field field_readonly field rows rows_ins
Property for Grid applications Property start cols Value filter Description Forces the Grid to start by the filter. Forces the number of columns. (vertical and slide kind)
rows lig_edit
on/off
Forces the number of lines per page. Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the record edition. (the pencil icon)
Property for all applications Property exit Value Description apl/url Forces application to exit to a specified location.
Ex. 1: Forces the "my_form" application to start in the addition mode. sc_apl_conf("my_form", "start", "new"); Ex. 2: Doesn't allow the "my_form" application make addition of new registers. sc_apl_conf("my_form", "add", "off"); Ex. 3: Sets "my_field" on the application "my_form" (readonly attribute) to "true" dinamically. sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field"); Ex. 4: Shows "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically. sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_on", "my_field"); Ex. 5: Forces the "my_grid" application to start by filter. sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "start", "filter"); Ex. 6: Forces the "my_grid" application to show 20 lines. sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "rows", "20"); Ex. 7: Hides "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically. sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_apl_status("Application", "Status")
Used to control the security access. These macros activate/deactivate the applications that a user has acess to.
Application: Is the name or the variable that contains the name of the application to be activated/deactivated. Status: Is the value or variable that contains the value to be attributed to the application. The values are: "on" to activate and "off" to deactivate. Ex. 1:
sc_apl_status ('atu_cad', 'off');
Ex. 2: sc_apl_status ({var_name_appl}, {var_status});
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_appmenu_add_item("String Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Adds dinamically an item to a menu application. To use this macro is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before. Parameter Description Menu_name Application menu name. Id_item Menu item id. Id_Parent Parent menu item id. For roots the null/empty value is passed. Label Menu item description. Aplication Menu item URL or application name Parameters String with parameters to pass to the menu item application. Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor Icon Path to icon used in menu item. Hint Descriptive hint to menu item. Target Target for menu item link. ("_self" to use the same window, "_blank" to a new one and "_parent" to exit the window. Ex. 1: Creates a menu named menu_main. sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Ex. 2: Adds a on the menu_main the the item_1 named Category. sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_1','','Category','');
Ex. 3: Adds a on the menu_main (item_2) the the item_1 named Category linked to the form_category. sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
Macro Scope Menu application
onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_appmenu_create("String Menu_Name")
This macro initializes the array used in the dimanically creation of the menu application. It must be informed the menu application name as parameter. This macro must be used in control events or onload menu event.
Ex. 1: sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_appmenu_exist_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Verify if a menu item exists and returns true or false. Parameter Description menu_name Menu application name id_item Menu item id Ex. 1: if(sc_appmenu_exist_item('menu_main', 'item_2')){ sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category'); } else{ sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category'); }
sc_appmenu_remove_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Remove dinamically a menu item. To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before. Par?metro Descri??o menu_name Menu application name id_item Menu item id
Ex. 1: sc_appmenu_remove_item('menu_main','item_2');
("String Menu_Name")
This macro reset the array used in dinamically creation of a menu application. It must be informed the menu application name as parameter. Ex. 1: sc_appmenu_reset('menu_main');
sc_appmenu_update_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Updates an application menu item dinamically. To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before. Parameter menu_name id_item id_parent Label Aplication Parameters Description Application menu item name Application menu item id Application menu item parent id. For roots the null/empty value is passed. Application menu item description. Menu item URL or application name String with parameter to pass to the application menu item
Icon Hint Target
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor Icone path used in menu item. Descriptive Hint for menu item. Target for menu item link
Ex. 1: sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
sc_begin_trans("Connection")
This macro starts a set of transactions in the database. In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the connection is the same of the application. In the other cases, if the user wish to make transaction control, must begin with this macro and finish with the "sc_commit_trans()" macro to confirm the updates or "sc_rollback_trans" to cancel the transactions. The "connection" parameter is optional, necessary only if the command is executed in a different database from the specified application.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick
OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_block_display(Block_Name, on/off)
Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block. By default all the blocks are displayed ("on" condition). Ex. 1: if ({type_customeri} == "personal") { sc_block_display(company, off); } else { sc_block_display(personal, off); } Obs: In grids, this macro only works with "slide" orientation.
Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onScriptInit onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit Form application onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_copy
Available when the "Copy" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_copy) { sc_message("Record copied successfully!"); }
Macro Scope
sc_btn_delete
Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_delete) { sc_error_message("Unable to delete this record"); }
Macro Scope Form application onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_display("Button_Name","on/off")
Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time. Button_Name: Is the variable name that contains the name of the button to be activated/deactivate. Buttons Name (Grid): Buttons Name first back forward last filter pdf pdfbw Description Goes to the first page of the grid. Goes to the previous page of the grid. Goes to the next page of the grid. Goes to the last page of the grid. Displays the "Filter" button. Generates colored PDF. Generates black and white PDF.
xls xml cvs rtf word print summary new insert update delete qsearch
Generates the XLS. Generates the XML. Generates the CVS. Generates the RTF. Generates the Word. Displays the "Print" button in the grid. Displays the "Summary" button in the grid. Displays the "New" button. (if the application has link for it, or if the form is running in the grid iframe) Displays the "Include" button of the form. (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) Displays the "Update" button of the form. (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) Displays the "Delete" button of the form (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) Displays the "Quick Search" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Form): Buttons Name first back forward last new insert update delete copy qsearch Description Goes to the first page of the form. Goes to the previous page of the form. Goes to the next page of the form. Goes to the last page of the form. Displays the "New" button on the form, if its off the form will starts in insertion mode. Displays the "Include" button of the form. Displays the "Update" button of the form. Displays the "Delete" button of the form. Displays the "Copy" button of the form. Displays the "Quick Search" button of the form.
Buttons Name (Control): Buttons Name ok exit Description Displays the "Ok" button on a control. Displays the "Exit" button on a control.
OBS. Remember that the buttons name must be lowercase. Ex. 1: sc_btn_display ('new', 'off'); Ex. 2: If we use variables or fields ({Fields} or [Global_Variables]) as parameters its not allowed the use of the quotes or single quotes. sc_btn_display ({variavle_button}, 'off');
Macro Scope
Grid application Control Form Form application onScriptInit onLoadAll onAfterDelete onRefresh onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit onAfterInsert onValidate onAfterInsertAll onValidateFailure onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_insert
Available when the "Add" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_insert) { sc_message("Record inserted successfully"); }
sc_btn_new
Available when the "Add New" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_new) { {My_Date} = date('Y/m/d'); }
Macro Scope Form application
onLoad
sc_btn_update
Available when the "Save" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_update) { sc_error_message("Record updated successfully"); }
sc_calc_dv(Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type)
Calculate verifier (checksum) digits. Parameter Digit Rest Value Module Weights Type Description Variable that will recieve the calculated digit. Variable that will recieve the "rest" of the division. Value or Variable to calculate the digit. Value or Variable containing the module to be used. Default value is module "11". Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Default value is the "98765432" values. Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal sum of the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels. Default value is "1".
Ex. 1: sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 11, 98765432, 1); Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x3=18 ; 5x4=20 ; 4x5=20 ; 3x6=18 ; 2x7=14 ; 1x8=8 Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 + 14 + 8 = 112 Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2 Digit: 11 - 2 = 9 Ex. 2: sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 10, 12, 2); Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x1=6 ; 5x2=10 ; 4x1=4 ; 3x2=6 ; 2x1=2 ; 1x2=2 Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26 Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6 Digit: 10 - 6 = 4
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_changed({Field_Name})
Macro to check if the field name have been changed. Ex. 1: if (sc_changed({my_field})) { Echo "Filed have been changed"; }
Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onGroupBy onRefresh Form application onBeforeUpdate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_change_connection("Old_Connection", "New_Connection")
This macro dynamically change the application connections.
Ex. 1: To change the connections: sc_change_connection ( "Old_Connection", "New_Connection"; "Old_Connection02", "New_Connection02"); Allows to change more then one application/connection in one command. Multiple connections can be passed as parameters that must be separated by ";" (semicolon). Ex. 2: To use variables or change the main connection as follows: sc_change_connection ([Global_Connetion], [Test_Connection]);
Ex. 3: To delete the exchange: sc_reset_change_connection (); The exchanges take effect in the following applications
Macro Scope
sc_commit_trans("Connection")
This macro has the objective to confirm a transaction set in the database. In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the connection is the same of the application. If the user, in any of these events, use an application redirectioning (macro "sc_redir") must before the redirect, use this macro to guarantee the transactions previously effected. The "connection" parameter is optional, being necessary, only, if the command is executed in a different database specified to the application.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onGroupBy onExecute onHeader onFooter onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_confirm("Message")
Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button. This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed, preventing mistakes. Ex. 1: sc_confirm ("Do you really wish to execute this action??");
Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onClick onClick Form application onClick
sc_date(Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y)
This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. For its use are necessary some parameters as follows: Parameter Description Date Date field that contains the date to be modified. Format Formatting thats the date field is. Operator "+" for increment and "-" for decrement. D Number of days to increment or decrement. M Number of months to increment or decrement. Y Number of Years to increment or decrement.
Ex. 1: {birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}), "dd/mm/yyyy", "+", 30, 0, 0); Ex. 2: $new_date = sc_date({birthdate}, "yyyy-mm-dd", "-", 15, 3, 2);
Ex. 3: {inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date('Ymd'), "yyyymmdd", "-", 0, 1, 1); OBS: To be certified of the date format, before use the function, try it in any event: echo "form_date =". {name of the field date};
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_date_conv({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format")
This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format. Parameter Description A or Y Used to reference years. M Used to reference Months. D Used to reference Days. Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format. Ex. 1: Converts the date from "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the "yyyymmdd" format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "aaaammdd"); Ex. 2: Converts the date from the database native format to "dd/mm/yyyy" format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "db_format", "dd/mm/aaaa");
Ex. 3: Converts the date from the "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the Database native format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "db_format");
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2")
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days. Parameter Date1 Format Date1 Date2 Format Date2 Description Date1 value or variable. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1. Date2 value or variable. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2.
Ex. 1: {amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}, "aaaa-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/aaaa"); Ex. 2: {amount_days} = sc_date_dif("2000-05-01", "aaaa-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/aaaa"); {amount_days} would be equal to 1451 (days)
Note: Formats can be different but must be in days, months and years.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif_2({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option)
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the amount of days, months and years.
The result is returned in an array structure, where the index 0 have the amount of days, the index 1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years. Parameter Date1 Format Date1 Date2 Format Date2 Option Description Date1 value or variable. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1. Date2 value or variable. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2. 1 = Doesn't consider the initial day; 2 = Considers the initial day.
Ex. 1: {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}, "yyyy-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/yyyy", 1);
{dif_days} = {differences[0]}; {dif_months} = {differences[1]}; {dif_years} = {differences[2]}; Ex. 2: {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy", 1); {differences[0]} = 20 (days) {differences[1]} = 11 (months) {differences[2]} = 3 (years)
Ex. 3: Using the option 2 {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy", 2); {differences[0]} = 21 (days) {differences[1]} = 11 (months) {differences[2]} = 3 (years).
Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days, months and years
sc_date_empty({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field is empty.
Ex. 1: if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) ) { sc_error_message ("Invalid Date"); }
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application Control Form onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onBlur onHeader onChange onRecord onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh Search application onRefresh OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_decode({My_Field})
Returns, the encrypted field or variable, to its original value. Ex. 1: Using a local variable: {my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript);
Ex. 2: Using an user variable: $my_var = sc_decode($field_cript);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open source algorithm)
sc_encode({My_Field})
Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.
Ex. 1: Encrypting a local variable: $field_cript = sc_encode({my_field});
Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable: $field_cript = sc_encode($my_var); Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity, (The algorithm provided is open source).
Macro Scope Blank application Grid Control Form application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onApplicationInit Search Form application Menu application application onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit
onExecute onFooter
onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit
onBlur onRefresh onChange onSave onClick onScriptInit onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_error_continue("Event")
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for the event passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer customized error treatment. It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}, {sc_erro_insert} and/or {sc_erro_update} The events to be passed as parameter are: insert, delete or update. Ex. 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql, trigger treatment, which cancels the record exclusion, displays a error message in the format [Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase the record. sc_error_continue("delete"); if (!empty({sc_error_delete})) { $tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}, "]"); if ($tmp !== false) { {sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}, $tmp 1); } sc_error_message({sc_error_delete}); sc_error_exit; }
Macro Scope Control Form application
Form onScriptInit
onBeforeDelete onBeforeInsert onBeforeUpdate
sc_error_delete
This variable returns a string with a database error message, which occurs by trying to exclude a record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. Like for example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they return messages. Ex. 1: Content of the variable {sc_erro_delete}, returning an error message generated by database trigger using MsSQL.?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase this register.? Note: To access the database return error, sees the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope Form application onAfterDelete
sc_error_exit(URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target")
Interrupts the application execution, if there is error message generated through " sc_error_message" macro, displaying the error messages. If informed an URL or the name of an Application, an "OK" button is displayed, bellow the error messages to redirect the processing to the informed URL/Application. The target parameter its opicional.
Ex. 1: Displays only the error messages. sc_error_exit();
Ex. 2: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to URL. sc_error_exit(http://www.mysite.com);
Ex. 3: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to Application, opening in another window. sc_error_exit(my_application, "_blank");
Macro Scope Blank application Control Form onBeforeUpdateAll onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_error_insert
This variable returns a string with the database error, that occurs when adding a record. It is used when is neede to treat these messages. For example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that return message. Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}, returning an error message generated by database trigger the using mssql ?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't add this register.? Note: To access the return of the database error, see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope Form application onAfterInsert
sc_error_message("Text")
This macro generates an error messages. In "Form and Control" applications, the messages are presented together with other error messages found in the application, except when using the "sc_error_exit" macro. In "Grid and Menu" applications the messages only will be presented through the " sc_error_exit" macro.
Ex. 1: if ({discount} > 0.10 && [glo_usr] == 'operator') { sc_error_message("Discounting of " . {discount} . " above of the allowed one"); } In this example, if the value in the discount field is over 0.10 and the user try to add or save this record, the operation is finished and the error message is presented.The command must finish with ");" (close parentheses and semicolon) used as delimiter for the macro interpreter.
Macro Scope Blank application Control Form onBeforeUpdateAll onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_error_update
This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. For example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}, returning an error message generate by a database trigger using mssql. ?[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You can't updatethis record.? Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope
Form application onAfterUpdate
sc_exec_sql("SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed. The "Connection" parameter is optional. Required only, if the command is executed in a data base different from the application. Ex. 1: if (sc_after_delete) { sc_exec_sql("delete from mytable where key = {key_ant}"); }
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onGroupBy onExecute onHeader onFooter onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_exit(Option)
This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return values/process after the execution. Option sc_exit() Description Returns to the previous application without display anything.
sc_exit(ok)
Displays a window with an OK button adn returns to the previous application. sc_exit(sel) Doesn?t display the window with an OK button and returns to the current application, repeat the application select. sc_exit(ref) Doesn't display the window with an OK button refresh data and returns to the current application. sc_exit(ok,ref) Same of the sc_exit(ref) function; however, display the OK button. sc_exit(ok,sel) Same of the sc_exit(sel) function; however, display the OK button.
This option is only valid for Form and Control Applications. Opton Description sc_exit() Doesn't complete transactions in database. sc_exit(c) Commit pending transactions. sc_exit(r) Rollback pending transactions.
Macro Scope Control Form onClick onScriptInit Form application onClick onScriptInit
sc_field_color("Field", "Color")
This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically. Ex. 1: Change the grid text field ?customer_id? color. sc_field_color ("customerid", "#33FF66");
Ex. 2: Change the "value_order? field text color, if the value is greater that 1000. Otherwise, use the default color. if ({value_order} > 1000) { sc_field_color ("value_order", "#33FF66"); } else { sc_field_color ("value_order", ""); }
Ex. 3: Using a local variable. sc_field_color ("customerid", {fld_color});
Ex. 4: Using a global variable. sc_field_color ("customerid", [glo_color]);
Macro Scope Grid application onRecord onScriptInit
sc_field_disabled("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it. Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option "true" (default) or "false". The parameter its optional, "I" its used only to block de addition of new records, "U" to block only the update, in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will use both options. Ex. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update. sc_field_disabled("Field_01"); Ex. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update. sc_field_disabled("Field_02=false"); Ex. 3: Blocks several fields, only for update. sc_field_disabled("Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U"); Ex. 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields, for adition and update. sc_field_disabled("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll Form application onLoad onNavigate
sc_field_display({My_Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically display a specific field. By default all the fields are display ("on" condition").
Ex. 1: if ({tp_customeri} == "personal") { sc_field_display({company_name}, off); } else { sc_field_display({personal_name}, off);
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application Control Form Form application onBeforeUpdateAll onScriptInit onBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onChange onAfterDelete onClick onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onAfterInsert onLoadAll onAfterInsertAll onRefresh onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterUpdateAll onValidate onBeforeInsertAll onValidateFailure Onchange OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_field_init_off(Field1, Field2,...)
This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load. Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the "Columns" button.
Ex 01: sc_field_init_off ({orderID}, {TotalValue});
Macro Scope Grid application onApplicationInit
sc_field_readonly({Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to 'ReadOnly'. Use this macro only to do it at 'runtime'. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. section "ReadOnly". The on/off parameter its opitional, used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be
read-only (On) or read-only (Off). Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in "Addition mode": if (sc_btn_new) { sc_field_readonly({my_field}); } Ex. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically use: sc_field_readonly({my_field});
Macro Scope Blank application Control Form Form application onBeforeUpdateAll onBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onChange onAfterDelete onClick onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onAfterInsert onLoadAll onAfterInsertAll onRefresh onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterUpdateAll onValidate onBeforeInsertAll onValidateFailure Onchange OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_field_style({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically. Parameter Field Background-Color (optional) Size (optional) Color (optional) Family (optional) Weight (optional) Description Name Field cell background Color Field font size Font Color Font family Font weight
Ex. 1: sc_field_style({my_field}, '#33FF99', '15px', '#000000', 'Arial, sans-serif', 'bold');
Macro Scope
Grid application onRecord onScriptInit
sc_format_num({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb", "Side_Currency_Symb")
This macro its used to format numerical values.
Parameter Description My_Field Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable). Group_Symb Integer values grouping symbol. Dec_Symb Decimals separator symbol. Amount_Dec Number of decimals to be displayed. Fill_Zeros Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no). Side_Neg Negative sign position. (1 = left and 2 = right) Currency_Symb Monetary symbol to be displayed. Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position. (1 = left and 2 = right).
Ex. 1: Formatting an integer. sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', ''); Input value = 001234567890 Output value = 1.234.567.890 Ex. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating decimals. sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', ''); Input value = 0012345678.90Output value = -12.345.678 Ex. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros. sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 4, 'S', '1', ''); Input value = 0012345678.9 Output value = 12.345.678,9000 Ex. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros and using monetary symbol. sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', 'US$'); Input value = 0012345678.9 Output value = US$ 12.345.678,90 Ex. 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros. sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', ''); Input value = .9 Output value = 0,90
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application Control Form Search application Form application Menu application
onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onBlur onRefresh onChange onSave onClick onScriptInit onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_form_show'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically display or not a form. By default, the form is displayed ("on" condition). Ex. 1: Doesn't display the form. sc_form_show = 'off';
Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onScriptInit Form application onLoad onScriptInit onValidate
sc_getfield('myField')
This macro is used to assign objects (that represent the field's form) to a javascript variable, allowing the user to access the object properties. This macro will run on control and forms at the javascript events and methods. EX: Showing the value of the "client" field of a form cli_js = sc_getfield('cliente'); alert (cli_js.value);
Macro Scope
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used. Ex. 1: $my_language = sc_get_language();
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used. Ex. 1: $my_regional = sc_get_regional();
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme used. Ex. 1: $my_theme = sc_get_theme();
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete
onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_groupby_label("My_Field")
This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines. Ex. 1: sc_groupby_label('state') = "state grouping";
Ex. 2: sc_groupby_label('balance') = "balance total";
Macro Scope Grid application onGroupBy
sc_image(Image01.jpg)
This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load images to an application. All images used in the applications are automatically copied to each application. Ex. 1: sc_image (img1.gif, img2.jpg);
Note: The images must exist in the development environment images directory (../devel/conf/sys/img/img/).
Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search Form Menu
application onExecute
application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onLoad onLoad onLoadRecord onScriptInit onValidate
sc_include("File", "Source")
The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications. To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at "Tools > Library" and use the "upload" option existing in the interface. When a script is catalogued, the user has the option of the context choice where it will be stored, global level (Scriptcase), group level or user level. - Public: All the projects will have acess. - Project: Only the project users (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess. - User: Only the user (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
The sc_include macro, the user must inform the script name that will be included and the source. - Script Name: Script name to be included. The Source context that the script was saved, that could be: - Sys or Blank: Scriptcase global level. - Prj: Group level. - Usr: User level.
Ex. 1: Including a catalogued script to global level. sc_include(my_script.php);
Ex. 2: Including a catalogued script to the group level. sc_include(my_script.php, grp);
Ex. 3: Including a catalogued script to the user level. sc_include(my_script.php, usr);
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll
onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit
onFocus onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_include_lib("Lib1", "Lib2", ...)
This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries. PHP Libraries fpdf fpdf_html excel rtf Ex. 1: sc_include_lib ("fpdf"); $pdf=new FPDF(); $pdf->AddPage(); $pdf->SetFont('Arial','B',16); $pdf->Cell(40,10,'Hello World!'); $pdf->Output(); JavaScript Libraries Jquery jquery_thickbox jquery_blockui tiny_mce
Macro Scope Blank application onFooter
sc_label({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
Ex. 1: Using the field name. sc_label("Customer") = "Cust Name";
Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter. sc_label({Customer}) = "Cust Name";
Ex. 3: Using a global variable. sc_label([global_variable]) = "Cust Name";
Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onNavigate onLoadAll onNavigate onScriptInit onScriptInit Form application onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit
sc_language
This macro returns the language and regional settings. Ex. 1: echo "Language: ".{sc_language};
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_link(Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width)
This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications. Column: Grid column field name to generate the link. Application: Application name to establish the link.
Parameters: Parameters required by the called application. Must be informed "=" (attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by ";" (semicolon). Hint: Observation or tip displayed when the mouse cursor passes over the link. Target : Where the application will function call and may be: Target "_self" "_blank" "iframeT" "iframeL" "iframeR" "iframeB" "modal" Descri??o For carrying on the same page (overrides the query); To run on another page (pop-up); To run in an iframe above the Grid (top); To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left); To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left); To run in an iframe below the Grid (Bot); Opens a new window and blocks any interaction in the main window;
In the case of modal target, there are two optional parameters *: *Height: Set the height of the modal window (default 440); *Width: Set the width of the modal window (default 630); Note: If omitted, will be assigned the value "_self". Ex. 1: Creates a link to the costumer.php application, on the Id field, passing the global variable [global_costumer] as and the product field (local variable) {Id} to the costumer.php application: sc_link(Id, costumer.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}, "Client Data", "_blank");
Ex. 2: Creating a dynamic link to another application depeding on the field valor {costumer_type} and opening it in a modal. if ({costumer_type} == "F") { sc_link (costumer_type, type_f.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Personal Data ", "modal", 500, 700); } else{ sc_link (costumer_type, type_a.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Company Data ", "iframeR"); }
Ex. 3: Creating a link to an URL: in this case, "paramater and target" have no effect. It will be executed redirecting to a informed URL. sc_link (my_field, http://www.scriptcase.com, ,"hint of the link");
Macro Scope Grid application onRecord
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute onFooter Grid application Control Form onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Form application
onValidate onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onValidateSuccess
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_log_add("action", "description")
This macro is intended to add a record to the log table, thereby making the message and / or the name of the action customizable to the developer. The macro parameters can use PHP variables. Ex: sc_log_add ("access", "Application has been accessed by the user trial");
Macro Scope
sc_log_split({description})
This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in the log table, allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update returning it in an array mode. The information is stored in the "description" field of the log table in the string format with delimiters. Ex: $arr_description = sc_log_split({description}); Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP] => 50710500 [Address] => Rua Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] => RS ) [new] => Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy, 1001 [City] => Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) )
Macro Scope
sc_lookup(Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the "dataset" variable. The "dataset" structure is an array (line/column). The "connection" parameter is optional. Use when the command is executed in a database different from that specified for the application.
Ex. 1: sc_lookup(dataset, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers" ); To have access to the first line (Dataset), use : {customer_id} = {dataset[0][0]}; {customer_name} = {dataset[0][1]}; {credit_limit } = {dataset[0][2]}; To have access to the second line (Dataset), use: {customer_id} = {dataset[1][0]}; {customer_name} = {dataset[1][1]}; {credit_limit} = {dataset[1][2]}; If occurs error in the execution of the SQL command, the variable attributed to the dataset will return as "false" and the error message will be available in the "dataset_erro " variable. It is also important to verify the select returned data, to prevent access to inexistent variables, once the output array only will be created if the select command returns data.
Ex. 2: sc_lookup(my_data, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers"); if ({my_data} === false) { echo "Access error. Message=". {my_data_erro} ; } elseif (empty({my_data})) { echo "Select command didn't return data"; } else { {customer_id} = {my_data[0][0]}; {customer_name} = {my_data[0][1]}; {credit_limit} = {my_data[0][2]}; }
Ex. 3: The SQL command also can be composed of application fields (local variables) or of global variables: sc_lookup(dataset, "select order_value from orders where clienteid = '{customer_id} ' and salesman_id = [var_glo_salesman]"); Note: The command must always finished with semicolon ";". Note2: For a big result returned in the dataset we recomend the use of the macro sc_selec instead of this one.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess
sc_mail_send(SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment)
This macro its used to send emails. Parameter SMTP Usr Pw From To Description SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the server name) SMTP user name. (String or Variable that contains the user name) SMTP password. (String or Variable that contains the password) From email. (String or Variable that contains the email) List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one variable that contains one array of emails. Message subject. (String or Variable that contains the subject) Message body. (String or Variable that contains the message) Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml. List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one variable that contains one array of emails. Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies). Server port. If omited, the ScripCase will assume the default value: 25 for not secure port and 465 for secure port.
Subject Message Mens_Type Copies
Copies_Type Port
Connection_Type Connection security (S) or (N). Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP "php_openssl" extension enable. Ex. 1: sc_mail_send('smtp.meuserver.com.br', 'usr', 'pw', 'from@netmake.com.br', ' to@netmake.com.br', 'Test Email Subject', 'Message', 'H', 'abc@cop.com.br;zxy@cop.com.br', 'H', '', '', 'c:/test/arq.txt');
Ex. 2: Usising variables and defining the port. sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], [usuar], [glo_pw], {from}, {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'T', [glo_copias], 'CCC', '419', 'S', {attached});
Ex. 3: No user and password. sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from.netmake.com.br', {to}, {sunject}, {message}, 'H', '', '', '', '', [glo_att]); The amount of emails sent will be stored at the special variable "sc_mail_count". If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email, the variable "sc_mail_ok" will recieve "false" and the error message will be stored on the variavle "sc_mail_erro". Ex.4 : sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from@netmake.com.br', {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'H'); if ({sc_mail_ok}) { echo "sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!"; } else { sc_erro_mensagem({sc_mail_erro}); }
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate
onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_make_link(Application, Parameters)
This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing html code). Parameter Description Application Name of the application to establish the link. Parameters Parameters necessary so called application. In the format: "=" (the attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by ";" (semicolon).
Ex. 1: Creating a string with a link for the datacli.php application, without parameters passage. $string_link = sc_make_link(datacli.php);
Ex. 2: Creating a string with a link for the application datacli.php, with parameters passage. $string_link = sc_make_link(datacli, parm1={company};parm2=[glo_office]);
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute onFooter Grid application Control Form onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess
sc_master_value('Object', Value)
This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application. Parameter Object Value Description Object name to be updated in Master Application. Its Not necessary the {} in a field name. Object value. The value can be a field or a variable.
Ex. 1: sc_lookup(result,"SELECT SUM(Total) FROM adm_pedido_itens WHERE PedidoID = '{PedidoID}'"); [valor] = {result}[0][0]; sc_master_value('ValorPedido', [valor]);
Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit Form application onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeInsert onBeforeUpdate onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure
sc_menu_delete(Id_Item1)
This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. Can be use in menu applications or tree menu. Observe that the parameters used in this macro are the "ID" of the items. If a menu item its removed and it have "nodes", they will be hidden too.
sc_menu_disable(Id_Item1)
This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Can be used in menu applications or tree menus.
The parameters passed are items "ID?. Menu items are deactivated recursively (when a submenu item is deactivated its ?nodes? are also deactivated).
sc_menu_item
This variable its only avaliable for menu application and has the objective of giving acess to a menu item that was selected, this way the user can take desicions before de called application runs. Ex. 1: To clean global variable. if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_1") { sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]); }
Ex. 2: If an application requires a global variable another application can initialize it accordingly. if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_5" && (!isset([glo_employ]) || empty([glo_employ]))) { sc_redir(apl_inf_emp); }
Macro Scope Menu application onExecute
sc_redir(Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error)
This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL.
If the redir uses parameters, these must be passed in the following format: 1) After the name of the application, use the comma delimiter (,) then 2) = (equal sign) . 3) More than one parameter, must be separated by semicolon (;) 4) The target determine which application is opened (default=_self): _self, _parent, _blank or modal. 5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: "F" redirects if there is error in the application (default value) and "E" does not redirect.
OBS. If your connection uses transaction control the use of this macro on the events onAfterInsert, onafterupdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onbeforeupdate or onBeforeDelete should come after the use of macro sc_commit_trans so this way it will save the form changes.
Ex. 1: Application without parameters nor target. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x.php); } Ex. 2: Application with parameters and without target. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx"); } Ex. 3: Application without parameters and with target. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x, "", "_parent"); } Ex. 4: Application with parameter and target. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank"); } Ex. 5: URL. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(http://www.my_page.com); } OBS. Everthing that was passed as parameter to the called application will be avaliable as global variable. EX: sc_redir(employee.php, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank"); In the employee.php application the parameters will be acessible at [parm1] and [parm2]
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onNavigate onNavigate onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_conf("Application", "Property")
This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf macro. The property parameter its opicional, if its passed it will only erase the modification from that specific application.
Ex. 1: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application, property "start". sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application", "start");
Ex. 2: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application. sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application");
Ex. 3: Deleting the modifications of all the applications. sc_reset_apl_conf();
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro has the objective to clean all security variables, set through the sc_apl_status macro. Ex. 1: sc_reset_apl_status();
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_reset_change_connection
This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro "sc_change_connection".
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form Form application Menu application
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onValidate onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_global([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...)
This macro has the objective to delete global variables, stored in the PHP session. Ex. 1: sc_reset_global ([Login], [Pass]);
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange
OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro its used to restore a menu item, deleted by the macro "sc_menu_delete". Ex. 1: sc_reset_menu_delete();
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro have the objective to enable a menu item, disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable". Ex. 1: sc_reset_menu_disable();
sc_rollback_trans("Connection")
This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database. The "Connection" parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a different data base from the specified to the application.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_script_name
This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was selected in the menu. Enable to select before the application is executed if a pre-process is required to an application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variables. if ({sc_script_name} == "apl1") { sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]); }
Macro Scope Grid application Menu application onScriptInit onExecute
sc_select(dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the "dataset" in the command. Different from sc_lookup macro, this macro doesn't manipulate the dataset (the user is responsible for all the manipulation). If an error occurs in the sql command execution, the variable attributed to the database returns as "false" and the error message is available in the "dataset_error" variable. The connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a data base different from the specified in the application.
Ex. 1: sc_select(my_data, "select clientId, clientName, limitecred from costumers"); if ({my_data} === false) { echo "Access error. Message =". {my_data_erro}; } else { while (!$my_data->EOF) { {clientName} = $my_data->fields[1]; $my_data->MoveNext(); } $my_data->Close(); }
Ex. 2: The SQL command can passed as application fields (local variables) or of global variables. sc_select(dataset,"select price order from order where clientId = '{clientId}' and cod_Seller = [var_glo_seller]"); Note: The command must always be finished with semicolon";".
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick
onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_select_field({Field})
This macro modify dynamically the SELECT: Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the original select.
Ex. 1: A table with the columns year and the months from January to December is used to create a grid using a parameter, displays the years and only a specific month. Passing the parameter as a global variable named "show_month", in the application is found the following structure: Select Clause: select year, pair_month from table sc_select_field(pair_month) = [show_month]; sc_label(pair_month) = [show_month]; Modify the select, and the grip column label. It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause. At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution execution during the grid time. Ex. 2: Select Clause: select code, name, value from table order by code. To change the order, from code to name, use: sc_select_order("code") = "name"; Note: This command must be in the context of the evento "onInit";
Macro Scope Grid application onScriptInit
sc_select_order("Field")
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause. At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution during the grid execution time.
Ex. 1: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price FROM table ORDER BY code To change the order from code to name, we will have: sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Ex. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price, date FROM table ORDER BY code, name, price To change the order from name to date, we will have: sc_select_order("name") = "date";
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
sc_select_where(add)
Is possible, during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE clause. Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes (") in the grids select. if (empty({sc_where_current})) { sc_select_where(add) = "where campoX > [global]"; } else { sc_select_where(add) = "AND campoX > [global_variable]"; } Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. It can be used, only in onRecord event. Ex. 1: if({sc_seq_register} == 10) { // last line of the page
{total} = {sum_total}; }
Macro Scope
sc_set_focus('Field')
This macro its used to set the focus to a form field. Ex. 1: sc_set_focus('name');
Macro Scope Control Form Form application onApplicationInit OnClick onLoadAll onLoad onRefresh onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateSuccess
sc_set_global($variable_01) or ({My_Field})
This macro its used to register global variables. Create a session variable with the same name and content of the local variable.
Ex. 1: Registering a users variable. $my_var = "mary"; sc_set_global($my_var); Creates a session variable with the name "my_var" with the "mary" content. Ex. 2: For register a field value as a session variable. sc_set_global({fieldname}); Note: This macro doesn't attribute values. Only register the session variables from PHP.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert
onRecord onScriptInit
onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_set_language('String Language')
This macro allows to define the application language dinamically. Ex. 1: Changes the laguage to English. sc_set_language('en_us');
Ex. 2: Changes the laguage to Spanish. sc_set_language('es'); It still allows to define the language and regional settings of the applications using a delimiter ";" between the parameters. Ex. 1: Changing the language to English and regional settings to Canada. sc_set_language('en_us;en_ca');
Ex. 2: Changing the language to Spanish and regional settings to Mexico. sc_set_language('es;es_mx');
Ex. 3: Changing the language to Germanian and regional settings to Luxembourg. sc_set_language('de;de_lu');
Ex. 4: Changing the language to Eslovak and regional settings to Slovak Republic. sc_set_language('sk;sk_sk');
Macro Scope
Blank application onExecute
Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess
Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit
Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_set_pdf_name"sc_my_file_name.pdf"
The resulting files of the exported data (PDF, XLS, XML, CSV and RTF) are stored in "temporary" directory specified in the Scriptcase's configuration in development and in production, with the prefix "sc_" followed by a unique identification so the file of a user does not overwrite to one another. The prefix "sc_" makes Scriptcase delete the old files. To assign different names Scriptcase patterns, can use the following macros: - sc_set_csv_name - sc_set_pdf_name - sc_set_rtf_name - sc_set_xml_name - sc_set_xls_name Ex1: sc_set_xls_name = "my_file.xls"; Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = "sc_my_new_file.csv"; NOTE: 1) These macros should be used in the event "onScriptInit." 2) Even using the macro, remained the prefix "sc_" (as Ex2), the Scriptcase will delete the file when it reaches the configured timeout limit (see the setting "File Lifetime" in the production environment).
Macro Scope
sc_set_regional('String Regional')
This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings. Ex. 1: sc_set_regional('en_us');
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_set_theme('String Theme')
This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically. Ex. 1: sc_set_theme('Newyellow');
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad
sc_site_ssl
This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. (https protocol)
Ex. 1: Using an affirmative. if (sc_site_ssl) { echo "ok - Safe site"; }
Ex. 2: Using a negative. if (!sc_site_ssl) { echo "Warning - Unsafe site"; }
Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isn't safe.
if (!sc_site_ssl) { sc_redir("http://www.erro_page.com/") ; } Note: This macro works only to the web server llS.
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onScriptInit Control Form Search Form application Menu application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onLoadAll onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterInsertAll onValidate onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure onAfterUpdateAll onValidateSuccess onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_injection({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable)
This macro its used to protect the field/variable against "sql injection". Macro used for protection against "sql injection" in commands generated by the developer when using the macros: sc_lookup, sc_select or sc_exec_sql.
Ex. 1: Protecting a local variable: $field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field});
Ex. 2: Protecting an user variable: $field_protect = sc_sql_injection($my_var); Note: that all database accesses, generated for the Scriptcase, have protection against "sql injection".
Macro Scope
Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit
Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate
Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onExecute onAfterDelete onLoad onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_protect(Value, "Type", "Connection")
This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used database, the "Connection" parameter is opicional, if not informed scriptcase will use the default connection. The "Type" parameter so far can only use the "Date" value. Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it can be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database. sc_select_where(add) = " AND news_noticias.noticia_data_pub BETWEEN ".sc_sql_protect($data_inicial, "date")." AND ".sc_sql_protect($data_final, "date")."";
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application Control Form onBeforeUpdateAll onRecord onLoadAll onExecute onValidate Search application OnValidate Form application onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsertAll onValidate
sc_trunc_num({My_Field}, Decimal_Number)
This macro its used to truncate numerical values, exceeding the amount of decimals specified. Par?metro Descri??o My_Field Variable with value to format (return in the same variable). Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display.
Ex. 1: sc_trunc_num({my_value}, 2); Input value = 1250.235 Output value = 1250.23 Input value = 1250.2 Output value = 1250.20 Input value = 1250 Output value = 1250.00
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate
onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_url_exit(URL)
This macro modifies the application exit URL.
Ex. 1: sc_url_exit(http://www.scriptcase.net);
Ex. 2: sc_url_exit(aplx.php);
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application Control Form onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onClick onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onApplicationInit onClick onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_warning'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control. Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable, an item of an inexistent array, etc. Ex. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display). sc_warning = 'off';
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onGroupBy onFooter onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
sc_where_current
Variable to reference the original command where clause and the last selection through the form filter. Reflects the where clause currently used. Ex. 1: $save_current_where = {sc_where_current};
Macro Scope Blank application onFooter Grid application onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit
sc_where_filter
This macro its used to save the variable to reference results generated by "filter", according with the filter form selections. This information will be added to the application original select where clause.
Ex. 1: $save_current_filter = {sc_where_filter};
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the application original select where clause. Can be used inside the scriptcase events, to treat the information, or to display in anywhere in the grid. Ex. 1: $save_where = {sc_where_orig};
sc_zip_file("File", "Zip")
This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. The file parameter must be one of the following:
- File name - Directory name - A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list. - A variable a file or a directory name. - A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list. The zip parameter must be the zip file name generated, or a variable containing its name.
Ex. 1: Only a file. sc_zip_file("/test/sample.htm", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 2: Only a directory. sc_zip_file("/test", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 3: Using an array of files and directories. $prep = array(); $prep[] = "/test/sample.htm"; $prep[] = "/test"; sc_zip_file($prep, "/tmp/test.zip");
Macro Scope Blank application Grid application onBeforeUpdateAll onApplicationInit onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess
Database Variables
Global variables containing database access values used by main connection. Variables Description sc_glo_servidor Server name. sc_glo_banco Database name. sc_glo_tpbanco Database type (mssql, oracle, mysql, etc). sc_glo_usuario Connected user name. sc_glo_senha Database password access. sc_glo_senha_cript Encrypted password (S/N). sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma).
Ex. 1: $my_database = [sc_glo_banco];
These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to attribute/modify the values). To define user and the password to connect to the database, use the following variables: Variables Description sc_db_master_usr User login to be used. sc_db_master_pass Password to be used. sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro). Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining valid during all the session (unless modified).
Ex. 2: An application type "control" with a form created with information "login" and encrypted "password". These data must be used to connect to the database, during the system applications execution. $temp_pass = sc_encode({password}); [sc_db_master_usr] = {login}; [sc_db_master_pass] = $temp_pass; [sc_db_master_cript] = "S";
Macro Scope Blank application onExecute onFooter Grid application onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur Onchange OnClick OnFocus Menu application onApplicationInit onExecute onLoad
Report PDF Variables
Page numbers variables used in Report PDF. Field Description {sc_page_num} Current page number. {sc_page_tot} Total number of pages.
Macro Scope
Totalling Variables
During break down and summary processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each break level. The routines are defined in event ? onGroupBy? determining the break levels and avalilable to each record. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the break name for the key word ? break?, as in: Variables Description {count_ger} Records total amount. {sum_parcel} Field ?parcels? total . {sum_balance} Field ?Balance? total . {count_break} Current break level records total. {sum_break_parcel} Current break level field ?parcels? total . {sum_break_balance} Current break level field ?Balance? total. Ex. 1: In an application with a break by state and city that totalizes a balance field, in the break totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows. {sum_break_balance} = {sum_break_balance} / {count_break};
Macro Scope Blank application onFooter Grid application onGroupBy onHeader onRecord
Totalling Variables (group by)
During the break down process, Scriptcase generates total variables to each break level. The routines are defined in event ?onGroupBy? determining the break levels. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the break name for the key word ?break?, as in: Variable Description {count_ger} Records total amount. {sum_parcel} Field ?parcels? total . {sum_balance} Field ?Balance? total . {count_break} Current break level records total. {sum_break_parcel} Current break level field ?parcels? total . {sum_break_balance} Current break level field ?Balance? total.
Ex. 1: In an application with a break by state and city and that totalizes a balance field, in the break totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows. {sum_break_balance} = {sum_break_balance} / {count_break};
Macro Scope Grid application onGroupBy
Events X Applications
Reference table of available macros by Events and Applications.

Blank application Grid application Control Form
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_field_init_off sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status
sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_global sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file
sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file onBlur sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning vari?veis database sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme
onChange
sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning vari?veis database onClick sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_confirm sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_zip_file vari?veis database sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_confirm sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exit sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_include sc_include sc_lookup sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_select sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis database onExecute sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database
onFocus
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include_lib sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning
onFooter
sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onGroupBy sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_changed sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_groupby_label sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o vari?veis totalizacao(quebras) sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional
onHeader
sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onLoad
onLoadAll
sc_alert sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_disabled sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_form_show sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_label sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_field_color sc_field_style sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_link sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onRefresh sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_changed sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database
onSave
onScriptInit
sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection ( sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_continue sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_exit sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_form_show sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_label sc_language sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file onValidate
sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_get_theme sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection ( sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database
Deployment Deployment - Overview

It is common to test new applications in a local development environment. Once the applications are satisfactorily tested in a secure environment then applications are released to production environment. The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP supported WEB server. The following topics cover the ScriptCase deployment process. Typical Deployment (recommended) Advanced Deployment. Configuring a Production environment
Typical Deployment
The user friendly typical deployment process generates a package with selected applications and libraries enabling instant project availability with minimum effort. Step 1: Select ScriptCase menu item Project Deploy, as in the image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy all the Project or select an application set.
Step 3: Select Typical deployment.
Step 4: Include the common libraries required by the applications in the production environment in the deployment package. Define Project initial application.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to select Deploy with common library unless when the common libraries are updated in another ScriptCase release.
Step 5: Choose Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options: 1 - Create ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link to the deployment package.
2 - Deploy on a Server directory: ??Deploy the applications in selected directory. Enter the directory specification as in image bellow. This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server.
3 ??? Deploy on FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server. Enter remote server required information as in image bellow.
Step 6: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.
Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using the system for the first time. Click here for more info.
Advanced Deployment
This deployment type is used to manually configure the production environment (common library) in the production server informing the exact environment location. Step 1: Access the ScriptCase menu item ProjectDeploy, according to image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy the entire Project (the entire application set) or a partial set of Project applications.
Step 3: Select Advanced deployment.
Step 4: Create a deployment template to save (and re-use) the defined configuration.
Step 5: Define the production environment directory structure according to the common libraries structure defined in the production server. Consider that environment directory root is prod_scriptcase. See a configuration example below. *Note ??? The character "/", means the Server Web root, utilized in relative paths.
Production Directory - Relative path to prod (dir). /prod_scriptcase/prod Images Directory (used for upload) - Relative path to img. /prod_scriptcase/file/img Temporary Directory- Relative path to tmp. /prod_scriptcase/tmp Documents Directory (used for upload) - Absolute path (full path) to doc. C:/Apache/Apache2/htdocs/prod_scriptcase/file/doc
Step 6: Name the connections used for Production.
Step 7: Select used Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options: 1 - Generate ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link to the deployment package.
2 ??? Deploy in Server directory:?? Deploy the applications in selected directory. This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server.
3 ??? Deploy in FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server.
Step 8: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.
Step 9: The common libraries are methods required by the applications in the production environment being required by the deployment package.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to download common library again. This info is not valid when the common libraries are update in another ScriptCase release.
Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using the system for the first time.here . Click here for more info.
Production Environment Production Environment Overview
Introduction - Production Environment

A production environment includes a common library set used by ScriptCase developed applications. It includes resources like: PDF?? programming, XLS (Excel), Database Access Layer, image processing and JavaScript libraries. ScriptCase production environment is compatible to the following platforms: Windows Linux IBM I5/OS400 FreeBSD Solaris Mac OS Production Server. A Production Server, where the production environment is installed , is the server where the Scriptcase applications are published (a Web Server supporting PHP).
Requirements: 1 - Web Server supporting PHP. 2 - Production Server configured with common libraries.
conf Configuration directory. file Directory used to upload files/images, saved in sub-dir doc and img respectively. prod Library directory used by the applications. tmp Temporary file directory.
diagnosis Configuration file with settings like: Operating System, Enabled Extensions, Directory and Files Enabled. ??Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-environment-produ????o/diagnosis.php).
info File with info about PHP release. Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-ambiente-
produ????o/info.php).
Production Environment Management Access Interface
Production environment configuration resources interface. ?? Access it via http://host or ip/raiz-ambiente-produ????o/prod
Interface Resources.
Click here to know more about those configurations
*Note ??? See the item Connecting with Database from the WebHelp for more info on how connect the ScriptCase.
Configuring The Production Environment
Production Environment
Extract the zip file.
Includes the common libraries in the Production environment directory _lib. In the example below was created a directory called "system" to store the applications.
Permissions ??? Reading, Write and Execution. For Windows Servers using Web IIS Server, is necessary to define the permissions in the directory _lib (common libraries), and in the CMD files (C:\WINDOWS\system32) for IIS users (IUSR_NOME-DO-SERVIDOR) . For Unix environment, is necessary to set common libraries permissions recursively. (directoty _lib, subdirectories and files) Example: chmod 777 _lib -R
Creating the connection with the Database using the management interface.
Step 1: Locate the production environment management interface, in the directory _lib. In the example: http://host or ip/system/_lib/prod
Step 2: Select Create new connection.
<img src="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv6/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0241_new_deploy3.png" " border="1" /> Step 3: Select the DBMS. In the example was used MySQL Database.
Step 4: Enter Database information (server id or name). Step 5: Enter Database user id and password. Step 6: Enter the same connection name defined in the development environment (ScriptCase). It must be the same name since the applications are configured to use it. Step 7: Test the connection and save the configurations. Step 8: Run the application to verify it. After clicking in Advanced. Step 9: Select the decimal number separator to use in the database. Ex: 1.21 or 1,21 Step 10: Choose if the connection will be persistent* or not.
Persistent Conexion: Persistent connections are connections that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Step 11: If you want to change the default charset (latin1, to MySQL) to record or edit to the database select the desired encoding.
Editing the connection

Step 1: Select Edit connection.
Step 2: Choose the connection and edit it.
Renaming the connection

Step 1: Select Rename connection.
Step 2: Select the connection then rename it.
Optional Settings
Temporary files directory: Absolute path to the tmp folder. Time to live (minutes) of files: Time, in minutes, the file will remain stored in the tmp folder. Path for Java Binary: Enter the absolute path of the java binary. If you want to use a java version different from the version installed in your computer inform the absolute path of that java. Java Binary: Enter the java executable file name. In Windows and Linux the default is java and you do not have to inform it, but for IBM, for example, you must to inform javac that is the name of the java executable file. PDF Server IP: Server's Internal IP on a network (NAT IP used to call the generated html exported by Scriptcase). Language: Select the language that you desire to the Production Environment. Authorization key to view Ggoogle maps: To use the Google Maps you must have the Authorization key, that is freely generated. Link to get the authorization key: http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html The key will be used only for one machine, because it's based on a digital signature.
Change Password
Step 1: Inform the current password.
Step 2: Inform the new password. Step 3: Confirm the new password.
Tools Tools
ScriptCase has a set of built-in tools to help the user to use its advanced options. The options available in the Tools menu are: SQL Builder - SQL commands fast formatting tool. Data Dictionary - Data Repository with reusable information about your data. Express Edit - Project Applications common attributes editor. Create Web Help Libraries Locales Layout
Sql Builder Sql Builder
SQL QUERYS building Wizard tool. Allows the choice of databases, tables, fields, joins, order by and where, visually. To access it, the user must choose the database, the SQL command, tables and fields. The builder then assemble the SQL command. Each of the sessions below covers a portion of the building process: Database Selection Tables Selection Fields Selection Joins definition Criteria Settings Order Settings Running the query Saving the query
Databases
DATABASE SELECTION
Choose the database that is used by the application. The user must choose the data base and click in the "Confirm" button. Upon completing the operation the wizard proceeds to next step.
Image1:Databases Folder.
Tables Selection
TABLE SELECTION
The next step, using the Tables Tab, is the tables selection used in the SQL command. To select a table, use the arrows. The selected table is displayed on the right. Click in Confirm to complete the selection proceed.
Figure1:Tables Folder.
Fields
Using the Fields tab, the user should select the fields used by the application. Select the fields as in previous steps. Click in Confirm to complete the selection and move to next step : JOINS definition.
Figure1: Fields Folder.
Attributes:
Table/Alias - Used to create an alias to the table name. It is used normally when a table is used more than once in the SQL command or the original name is too extense or complex.
Joins
Use this tab to create join commands with SQL tables selected on Tables tab. It can be acccessed after set the definitions in the Fields Tab. An example of join use would be the following: In a table of customers register T1 there is the "Customer Code" field. In a Purchase Order T2 table also there is the "Customer Code" field and the purchase orders of the customers. If we are making a join of the tables CadClientes and CadPedVendas, we will use a commom field ("Customer Code") and we will have as result a cartesian product of these two tables in accordance with the kind of defined join (equal to, bigger than, smaller than...). In other words, they will be joined and the data ordered in accordance with the kind of defined join.
Figure1: Join folder
Table 1 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the first join table. Type - Join type: Inner - Left Join Right Join Bigger Smaller Bigger Equal Smaller Equal Not Equal Table 2 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the second join table. Add Button Update Button Remove Button Clean Button Chart - Presents the join command mounted;
Figure 2: Join Folder with fields.
The window initially presents two lines of fields for joins realization. Each field contains the list of the table fields selected. If the two lines are fulfilled, clicking on the Confirm button, will be opened more two fields, therefore the SQL Buider undrestand that the user wishes to make more joins. If not, the user can leave the folder, therefore the commands were already incorporated in the main command that is being mounted. To being make a join the check box on the left of the field line is automatically fulfilled. Click in Confirm to move to next step, the Criteria settings used to define search conditions.
Criteria
Use the Criteria tab to set the search condition used by SQL Buider for each selected field.
Figure1:Conditions Folder.
Attributes : Conditions - To set the search condition for a field, the user select the field (from a list of selected fields in the Fields folder) and select the operation: = Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records that contain the selected field; > - Greater than- Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values greater than the value entered in the next box; < - Less than - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values less than the value entered in the next box; >= - Greater or equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values greater or equal to the value entered in the next box; <- - Less or equl to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that are less or equal to the value entered in the next box; <> Not Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that don't contain the selected field; LIKE - Means equal and is applied to text fields, when the database doesn't allow the use of the "=" symbol; Example: To search for records of customers born from 01/01/1970, select the Date of birth field, select the symbol >= and enter "01/01/1970". Click in Confirm to move to next step : Execution folder or Saved folder.
Order By
This tab is used to set the order used to display each selected in the application. Select the field in the combo box, and select the order criteria: ASC = Ascendant or DES = Descendant and click on Confirm.
Figure1:Order by Folder
When confirming it, SQL Builder moves automatically to the next step : Execution folder or Saved folder.
Run
Use this tab to execute the SQL command created from the selections, search and order criteria defined by user.
Figure1: Execution Folder.
Attributes> SQL command : The SQL command assembled from the user information (selections, search and order criteria). Records per Page - Determine number of records displayed on result. Example: 30 registers per page; Run Button - Executes the created command. Copy Button - Copy the SQL command to save (copied) into the application in the SQL command area.
Save
SAVING THE QUERY

SQL commands can be saved to be use in the future. The user can create a new command from an already existing command.
Figure1: Save Folder.
Saved Statments - A list of existing (saved) SQL commands. To edit the command - Edit the the SQL command. Remove the command - Deletes the SQL command. Save statement as: Enter a name to save the SQL command above.
Database Builder Database Builder
Databse Builder - Overview

Database Builder allows the Scriptcase user to manage his database or create a new one. Access it through the menu Tools >> Database Builder
Image 1: Database Builder Access.
Database Builder is available in several languages and it can manage any database enabled in Scriptcase.
Image 2: Selecting a database.
After selected a database connection created in the project we have total control of the database.
Image 2: Database Builder Interface.
Interface: 1. SQL Command - Executes a SQL command. 2. Dump - Exports the database as a SQL dump. 3. Logout - Exit from the current database management. 4. Select Database - It allows to select any database existing in that connection. 5. Create Table - Creates new tables in the database. 6. Select - View the table records. 7. Tables - View the table structure. 8. Selected Option - Shows the path of the current option selected. 9. Database Options - Allows to edit the database, schemas and privileges 10. Seearch - It looks inside the database what was typed there. 11. Options to multi tables - Execute a function for several tables at the same time. 12. Move / Copy - Move or Copy all information from the current database to another one. 13. Creating - There we have options to create: Tables, Views, Procedures, Functions and Events.
Sql Command
It allows us to execute any SQL command or import a .sql file to execute it.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Command.
Sql Dump
It allows us to export the database through a SQL dump to several export formats.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Dump.
Create Table
It allows us to create new tables in the database.
Image 1: Database Builder Create Table.
Select
This option allows us to see all records from a table. It executes a SQL command: SELECT * FROM table
Image 1: Database Builder Select.
Table Options
In this screen we can see the structure of the table.
Image 1: Database Builder Table.
Alter Table - Clicking on it, we can alter the table structure. By adding or changing field names, types, etc.
Image 2: Database Builder Alter Table.
New Item - Clicking on it, we can insert a new record into the table.
Image 3: Database Builder New Item.
Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers - They allows to add or alter Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers.
Data Dictionary Data Dictionary
Using ScriptCase data dictionary users can create a data repository to use in generated applications. The data associated to database table fields are stored to be used in different applications. It very useful to create a normalized data environment in an organization. It also improves development by speeding up data update and by minimizing errors (updates data only once in a single place - the repository - and have it used in all applications).
Allows to standardize: Data Type Label Size Decimals Description OPERATIONS
Operations performed in the repositories: Open - Determines the tables containing definitions and the fields used. Properties - Displays and updates selected repository general definitions. Delete - Removes (deletes) selected repository.
Repository
Creates new repository for a specific data base.
Since a Scriptcase repository is associated to database table fields there is a logic relationship between a repository to a database. ScriptCase data dictionaries are organized by database. Attributes: Data Dictionary Name - Repository ID. Description - Repository description; Connection - database connection used. Associate dictionary with connection - link your repository with the connection. When a repository is created the system identifies the database tables existent. Add new tables to the repository or update the tables. Use the Databases Tables tab to select an existent database table and include it to the repository. It is possible to add a lable to it to be used externenally to the database.
Figure2:Database Tables.
Use the Repository Tables tab to update the information about a repository table.
Figure3: Data Dictionary Tables
A created repository can be included in the language files.
Figure4:Language file index generation.
Table Update
Attributes: Data Type - ScriptCase field type.
Label - Enter a label to the field. Length (DB) - Define the field length in the applications; Decimals - Use for fields type DECIMAL, NUMERIC, etc. SQL Type - Database field type.
Edit
Figure1: Data Dictionary Properties.
The Data Dictionary properties are displayed. Edit the property and click in Update to commit the changes.
Figure2: Update Data Dictionary properties.
Attributes: Data Dictionary - Data Dictionary ID. Description - Repository description. Connection -Table connection used.
Express Edition Express Edition
A new Scriptcase resource now available is APLICATIONS EXPRESS EDITION (by project). Using this resource is possible to define attributes common to more then one project application. See below a minitutorial on how to use the EXPRESS EDITION step-by-step.
1- Select the application to edit (edit mode): All or select a set.
Figure1:Selecting the applications.
2 - Selecting a application set to edit.
Figura2: Select application to edit using Express Edition.
3 - Select the properties to apply to the selected application as well as the Express Edition type
(individually per application or "in bulk").
Figure3: Select Express Edition type.
4- Define the selected applications common attributes. Click in Apply to perform the Express Edition.
Figure4: Editing Parameters.
Helpcase Overview
This tool is used to create your application?s manual, basically you can create and edit. HTML files, upload images, you can also create navigation menus or bookmarks, searches. Is very easy to integrate your applications with the help files generated by the help case.
Creating A Manual
Creating a new manual

One Manual built on HelpCase is always associated to one ScriptCase project. As you can see on picture1, on the creating interface you don?t need to specify the project because you are already positionated on a project.
Picture1: Creating a new manual.
Editing A Project
Picture1: WebHelp main interface.
Top Buttons Bar: This bar is responsible for maintaining the folders and files in the directory selected.Initially, the project contains a single directory called root ( ). The directory that you create will appear in the left treeview menu . -Creating a new .HTML file Creates a new .HTML file on the selected directory.
Picture2: Creating a new .HTML to the Manual.
- Creating a new folder Creates a new folder on the current directory.
Picture3: Creating a new folder into the /root
Picture4: Manual folders.
- Removing a folder and all it?s files The root folder can?t be removed.
Project Maintence
Generate Webhelp - Compiles your manual into a frames page, with bookmarks and a search page. Upload - Uploads files to your manual project. Initial Page - Link to edit your manual?s start page. Header - Link to edit your manual?s header. CSS - Link to edit your manual?s CSS. Links - Here you can crate links from your system?s applications and your manual?s pages.
Libraries
Libraries resource allows implementing standard routines in many applications and projects. You can use three different levels (Public, by Project and by User). For libraries at Project level , use the option Default Values in the Menu Project so that each new application already is created with the libraries.
Locales Locales
Scriptcase allows to create applications with Internationalization. Using a Language Editor select which languages will be used in a project and maintain texts displayed on applications. With the Regional Settings Editor define rules to format numbers, currency, date and time.
Languages Regional settings
Languages
The ScriptCase language tool allows to translate developed application standard messages enabling a comfortable and friendly system usage. Using this tool is possible to create customized messages to be used in different applications. A multilanguage project can be developed since language selection can be changed at authentication time or during application execution.
Figure1: Language Settings.
Messages Menu
Using the messages menu is possible to select and edit messages by blocks, divided into ScriptCase Messages and My messages. New blocks can be created using the item New Folder. Selecting a block an available message index is displayed and open to edit.
Figure2: Message Menu.
Language Menu
Regional Settings
The regional settings allows to define monetary currency parameters, date and number formatting according to the region where the application is used. Click in customize to enter the values better suitable to the applications.
Image1: Regional Settings.
Customizing the Regional Settings.
The item Number define parameters like decimal symbol, negative format, and digits grouping. These are parameters applied in applications using decimal type field.
Image2: Regional settings - Number parameters.
In the Currency unit are available parameters like currency symbol, currency positive format among others. These parameters applied in applications using currency type field.
Image3: Regional settings - Currency parameters.
The items Date and Time define parameters applied in date and time formatting used in Date and Time, Time, and Date type fields.
Image4: Regional settings - Time parameters.
Image5: Regional settings - Date parameters.
Layout Display
Layout
It is possible to edit or create layouts to be used in Projects developed with ScriptCase. ScriptCase Layouts can be defined using: Themes, Templates, Buttons, Group Buttons and CSS Menus options. Themes option uses a CSS Editor to create applications visualization standards. In Templates, edit and/or add Header and Footer templates. Using Buttons and Group Buttons is possible create or edit Text or Image for buttons to customize the generated applications. CSS Menus uses a menu CSS Editor to create menu themes for menu applications.
Figure1: Layout Interface.
Themes Buttons Group Buttons Templates CSS Menus
Themes
In Themes using a CSS Editor is possible to create applications visualization standards. It is possible to create new themes or edit an already existing one.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
When creating a new theme, it inherits all attributes of the selected theme.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
Buttons
Using the Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new buttons set associated to Schemas. Buttons set can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar. In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different characteristics (image, text or link). For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure
the new style. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css, default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Templates
Templates resource allows to include HTML files to be used in Headers, Footers and Custom Grids(User defined orientation). For example: billets, invoices, business cards, etc.
Figure1: Edit Templates Interface: Heading, Free Format and Footer.
It should be a HTML file. We can stipulate where Scriptcase fields will be displayed on the HTML file using "curly brackets" {variable}. As you can see below: HTML Code <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> {Name} {Address} {City}- {State} {ZIP} </td> </tr> </table> Running the HTML code above. {Name} {Address} {City}-{State} {ZIP}
Remember that everthing that comes insde curly brackets are making reference to the application fields, so when there is a {Name} it will be talking about the field "Name" of your application.
In the Template we can define a Loop feature using a flag (see in red): Cdigo HTML <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr>  <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> {Name} {Address} {City}- {State} {ZIP}
 </td>  </tr> </table>
The red parts define where the loop will start and finish. The iterations amount is defined by "Columns per Page" of the Grid. eg: If "Columns per Page" is 3 so it will display the following result. HTML code <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> {Name} {Address} {City}- {State} {ZIP} </td> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> {Name} {Address} {City}- {State} {ZIP} </td> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> {Name} {Address} {City}- {State} {ZIP} </td> </tr> </table> Running the HTML Code above. {Name} {Name} {Name} {Address} {Address} {Address} {City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State} {ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP}
Once ".html" file iscreated include it in Scriptcase accessing "Tools>>Layout>>Templates". Select "Free Format" and Upload the file. Then Create a new Grid application and select "User Defined" Option in "Orienation" setting. Access "Grid>>Layout>>Settings" and select the "Body Template". Now associate the template variables with the Grid fields. (Grid>>Select Fields) Format the fields and Run.
Group Buttons
Using the Group Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new group of buttons set. Buttons set can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar. In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different characteristics (image, text or link). For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure
the new style. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css, default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Themes
CSS MENUS
The CCS menu is used to create/edit styles for the menu layouts.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.
To create a new menu theme it will needed to chose the target of this new theme, it can be saved as Public (the theme will be avaliable to everyone who uses scriptcase to use it), it can be saved as Project (the theme will be avaliable only for this particular project) and it can be saved as User (the theme will only be avalibale to the use who create it). On the CSS editor we can edit the CSS settings from the menu and his submenu, selecting the menu color, menu hover color, font settings, alignment and edge configuration.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.
Options Options
ScriptCases production and development environments are easy to manage. The developer can customize the environment while managers can set security polices and fault recovery process. The management options are grouped in categories as follow: Settings - ScriptCase administrative tasks. The options in this menu allows the user to install licenses, update to new ScriptCase versions, define projects security polices, manage fault recovery and Configure systemparameters and attributes. My ScriptCase - Customize the development environment. Change password - Password administration.
Settings Settings
The ScriptCase administration is restricted to users with ADMINISTRATOR profile. During the ScriptCase installation a system administrator account is created.
Figure1: Administration Menu
Here is possible to customize the ScriptCase general environment.
System System
Customize system folders, system default variables and other system settings.
Figure1: System Settings Options.
The ScriptCase environment according to the business group needs by selecting from the options below: System Settings - Define ScriptCase default settlings: language, backup options, version control and others. Default Values - Define attributes used as new projects default options. System Folders - Define default path and folders.
System Settings
Figure1: System Settings Interface.
Attributes: Language - Select ScriptCase Interface language. This is the language used in ScriptCase development environment. Application Automatic Number of Copies - Determine the number of application copies that ScriptCase automatically saves. ScriptCase keeps multiple copies of each application. Each "version" can be identified by a timestamp. Alert if the last backup is older than (days) - Number of days used to calculate and display the "expired backup" alert message. ScriptCase warns when a backup is due. Show backup alert for - The users group informed with the backup expired message . The options are Only Administrators or All the users. Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Days to check for ScriptCase new versions (at login). The options are the following ones: Do not check, Check every day and Check define day. Check version every - Used when option Check define day is selected for the item Check for ScriptCase update versions (at login) above. ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - ScriptCase Session time limited in minutes. Useful when more then one developer use a single license. Use cache for table fields - Speed up long table processing. Useful when using very large tables. SMTP Server - Enter the sending email server. Used to automatic e-mail, for example when the user forgets the login password. SMTP Port - Enter the server port , default is Port 25.
SMTP User - Enter the server user. SMTP Password - Enter the user email server password. SMTP E-Mail - Enter the email used to sent the password. PROXYServer - Enter the proxy server id. Scriptcase uses it to access the web for update / version control checks. PROXY Gateway - Enter the proxy gateway. PROXY User - Enter the proxy user. PROXY Password - Enter the proxy password. To use session in database - Store session data in database. ScriptCase Applications can use session variables stored in the database. This options is very useful when working with session variables and also load balance it also increase environment security. Show an option in the deployment to store the PHP session in the Database - Select session data storage format during deployment.
Default Values
All the attributes defined here are copied to new projects default options.
Figure1 Default ValuesInterface.
Attributes: Use Ajax - Use Ajax processing in new projects. Useful when creating projects where Ajax resources are undesirable. Logo Image -Logotype image name used in application heading . Customize the project using the same logo in all application header. Report page row limit - Number of rows to display in each application page. Themes - Color Schema. Display Summary - Display summary line.
Templates ------------------------------------------------------
Grid Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase grid application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as default to all grid applications in the project.
Form Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase form application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as default to all grid applications in the project.
Search Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase Search application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition
here as default to all grid applications in the project.
System Folders
Define default path and folders. Inform ScriptCase the path to the actual storage area where to locate information used by the applications.
Figure1:System Folders Interface.
Attributes: Web Server Document Root Directory - WEB server root , for IIS the default is inetpub/wwwroot, for the apache servers apache/htdocs. Application Path - Path used to store created applications. Common Libs Path - Path used to store Scriptcase Common Libs. Documents Folder- Directory to stored documents in used the applications. Images Folder - Directory used to store the images used in the applications. Temporary Files Folder - This temporary storage is an HTML condition.
Projects And User Projects And User
Figure1: Project and User.
The ScriptCase is based on the concept of Projects. It is used as applications logical repository. Users must be associates to Projects with a development profile that is individual for each project. Projects - Define projects security polices. Users - Create users and associated profiles.
Projects
Display all projects developed and allows to manage the projects available.
Figure1: Project Management Summary Interface.
Click in the
to display project attributes as in the following screen:
Figure2: Project Details Interface.
Users
Figure1: Interface.
Enter the a user name an click in
to find a user.
Note: A user list is displayed with information about the available users and action options to apply to selected users.
Click in
to display user details.
Click in Click in
to edit user information. o change user password.
Figure3: Password Interface.
To create a new user click in the New User button.
Figure4: Create User Interface.
Attributes: User - User ID. E-mail - User e-mail address. New Password -Enter a new password to the user; Confirms Password- Enter the password again to confirm; Privilege- Define user ScriptCase access profile . Project - Projects accessible to the developer. (select from the available projects) The screen below allows you to select the projects to be managed by the user. All projects will be displayed in the box left and right in the box will display the projects that were selected through the selection bar, to be administered by the user. After making this process you must click the save button and then the user will be included.
Figura5: Projects Administrator Interface.
Services Services
Figure1: Services Options Interface.
Tools used in fault recovery management such as: OnLine Backup Restore ConImageLog View Log
Online
ScriptCase users online log information.
Figure1: Online interface.
The following information is available about each user: User ? User login id. IP ? User work station IP. Logon ? User login time (hour and date). Access ?User last access time (hour and date). OnLine ? User login elapsed time. Page ? ScriptCase page that the user is accessing at the moment. Application ? ScriptCase applications that the user is executing at the moment.
Backup
Figure1: Backup Interface.
Enter a backup file name and select the backup option desired: Partial Backup (only some objects will be selected) or General backup to backup all the objects.
Figure2: Partial Backup Interface.
Click in to select all the application elements (users, connections, projects, schemas, templates, buttons, lookups, icons and images). Click in the Action desired element to include in the backup. to perform the operation on selected element and select the
A final report will be displayed when backup is completed.
Figure3:Backup Interface.
It is recommended to download the archive, in the end of in process to another machine.
Restore
A list of files available to restore is displayed.
Figure1: Restore Interface.
Upload a file to restore. It is possible to upload a backup that is store in a zip file. Click in files. Enter the information about the file to upload or click in browse to find it. to upload and restore (.zip)
Figure2: Restore Interface.
Once the files are available to ScriptCase select it from a display above.
Select the files to restore and click in the action buttons file.
to perform the operation on selected
After selecting a file to restore choose the restore process by configuring the restore process directives. Restore process selection.
Figure3: Interface options of Restore.
The file selected previously is displayed with information about creation time and usage Status. If Duplicated - Select between the options : NOT TO RESTORE or OVERWRITE the applications. Restore Type - Choose between restoring all files or a partial Restore.
Partial Restore
Figure4: Partial Restore Interface.
Select elements to restore individually. Restore Report A status report is displayed after the restore is completed.
Configure Log
The ScriptCase keeps a Log with information about user performed main operations. There is a default selection of operations. The Log can be customized to record only specific operations according to business needs and preferences. Important: For security reasons do not unselect all options.
Figure1: Log Interface.
View Log
This feature allows the administrator to monitor the main operations carried by ScriptCase users. The operations are displayed by Date and information such as: user login ID, user workstation IP , time, the operation type of and Action is displayed. In the displayed calendar the days are shown in three tonalities, clear means that he didnt have log, darkest he registers the days where he had access, and of pink color the day that this chosen team.
Figure1: View Log Interface.
Scriptcase Update
This option can be used to bring ScriptCase up to date. Including corrections, programs , documnetation lnew versions, etc. All the update process is made through the Internet directly from ScriptCase site. We recommend a connection with minimum speed of 128 Kbps.
Figure1: Interface Scriptcase Update.
FIRST STAGE (To verify ScriptCase Update) In this first stage the verification in the site of the ScriptCase will be made if a new version of software ScriptCase Update exists, in case that a version exists but new the update is made.
Figure2: Interface Verifying Update.
SECOND STAGE (To look updates) Its system will be examined and identified the available updates directly of the site of the ScriptCase.
Figure3: Interface To lower and to install joined updates.
THIRD STAGE The ScriptCase will directly lower of the site ScriptCase the found updates, and will make the update of its system.
Figure4: Screen successfully effected Update
Licenses Licenses
ScriptCase license management. Once using the ScriptCase there request a new license using this option. Then it is possible to register a license and install it also using the options on the menu below.
Figure1: Licenses Options.
Register On-line
ScriptCase access the site, verifies and updates all the license permissions.
Figure1: Register OnlineInterface.
Enter a valid ScriptCase serial number and press the register button. After successful registration your ScriptCase copy ready to use with all available functionality.
License Request
Request a ScriptCase license:
Figure1: License Request Interface. Click in the request button to download a .rec file by following the link displayed. A .lic file will be send via e-mail attachment. Go to installation option to install the license receive by e-mail.
Installation
Click in the browser button to find the full path to the license file received. Click in register button to complete the installation.
Figure1: License Installation Interface.
My Scriptcase
It allows to define default values to Scriptcase.
Image1: My Scriptcase Interface.
Language - Define the language used in the Scriptcase GUI ( Error Messages, Control Messages, etc.). Security Resources - Enables you to disable the use of security in the development. Initial Information - Select information displayed in the ScriptCase Main Menu. Pop-up Window - Enable pop-up window display for the selected resource. Main MenuInterface - Updates Applications Menu (the space between the Treeview menu and the applications display menu). Application Edition Interface - Update the Application width. Applications Creation - The options are the Wizard (Standard) and Express (Express Edition). Auto Save - Allows automatically saving changes in ScriptCase. Select the first menu item - Select the first menu item.
Change Password
Accessing Options > Change Password menu, is possible to update the password to access Scriptcase.
Image1: Main Menu - Options.
Type the old password, the new password, then confirm the new password. Click on Save to modify and save it.
Image2: Change Password Interface.
The password is case sensitive. That is, words can differ in meaning based on differing use of uppercase and lowercase letters. admin is different from Admin and ADMIN
Appendix Appendix
See also some useful information at : Programming Tips Variables in Scriptcase
Variables In Scriptcase
Dependent Applications Concepts. ScriptCase considers dependent applications those applications (Form or Grid) that need to receive external parameters (variables) passed by Get or Post HTML methods. To build a Dependent Grid specify which parameters receive external values by using square brackets [ ] to indicate a "global variable" on the WHERE or HAVING clause. For example: SELECT field1,field2 FROM table_duplicates WHERE cod_client = [glo_clientid] Scriptcase uses variables in any application event or method. There are Local Variable and Gobal variables:
Local Variables
$var1 = 'local';
It should be used as a common PHP variable (beginning with $).
It is used in only in an event or method. Its scope ends at the end of the event. If it is being used in onLoad event it will be used just in that event.
Global Variables
Before the browser sends the information, it encodes it using a scheme called URL encoding. In this scheme, name/value pairs are joined with equal signs and different pairs are separated by the ampersand. GET Method - sends the encoded user information appended to the page request. The page and the encoded information are separated by the ? character. POST Method - transfers information via HTTP headers. The information is encoded as described in case of GET method and put into a header called QUERY_STRING. Scriptcase uses global variables with square brackets. [var2] = 'global'; It can be called in any event or method of an application.
Note 1: A local variable can be a global variable if you use sc_set_global $var3 = 'testing'; // var3 is a local variable sc_set_global($var3); // transforming var3 in a global variable echo [var3] ." global variables"; // Now we can call [var3] in any other event
Session Variables It is used like a global variable (with square brackets)

[var4] = 'session'; But you must access "Application>>Global Variables" to set var4 to be "SESSION". Session variables can be called in any event of any application. If created it in the login application it can be called it in any project application.
Note 2: Accessing "Application>>Global Variables" you can define if a global/session variable is IN or OUT variable. If the application is CREATING the variable, it should be an OUT variable. If the application is RECEIVING the variable from another one, it should be an IN variable. (IN is default)
Note 3: Global and Session variables can be reseted using sc_reset_global macro. sc_reset_global ([var3],[var4]);
Fields Variables Field values can be called in an event using "curly brackets".
{field_x} = 'field_x receive this value'; {field_y} = [var3]; {field_z} = {field_y};
Programming Programming
This section offers PHP programming tips and available Macros in the ScriptCase.
PHP programming tips Scriptcase Macros SQL programming tips
Php Commands
if for date trim
else foreach strpos substr
elseif break str-replace substrreplace
while continue ltrim array
do while functions rtrim activex
Arrays
An Array in the PHP is currently a commanded map. A map is a type that relates values with keys. You can use it as an array, or a list (vector), hashtable, dictionary, collection, stack, line and probably more. As you can have another Array PHP as a value, you can easily simulate trees.The explanation of these structures is beyond the target of this manual.
Syntax
An Array can be created with the constructor of Array() language. array( [chave =>] value , ... ) // key pode ser tanto string ou um integer // value pode ser qualquer coisa <?php $arr = array("foo" => "bar", 12 => true); echo $arr["foo"]; // bar echo $arr[12]; // 1 ?>
The key can be integer or a string. The value can be any type PHP: <?php $arr = array("somearray" => array(6 => 5, 13 => 9, "a" => 42)); echo $arr["somearray"][6]; // 5 echo $arr["somearray"][13]; // 9 echo $arr["somearray"]["a"]; // 42 ?>
If you to specify a key that already in use, then the value associated to it is updated. <?php array(5 => 43, 32, 56, "b" => 12); // ... this array array(5 => 43, 6 => 32, 7 => 56, "b" => 12); ?>
Creating/modifying with the square brakets syntax

That is another way to create and/or update an array as in the example below.
$arr[key] = valuer; $arr[] = value; //key can be integer or string
// value can be anything
To remove a pair key/value, you need to apply the unset(). <?php $arr = array(5 => 1, 12 => 2); $arr[] = 56; // The same as $arr[13] = 56;
$arr["x"] = 42; // new element to array with "x" key unset($arr[5]); //remove an array element unset($arr); // remove the complete array ?>
It notices that the greater entire key, used for, this necessarily don?t need existing in the Array. It can have existed in the Array since the last time that the Array was indexed. He sees the following example. <?php // Creating an array $array = array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5); print_r($array); // Removing the array values leaving an empty structure. foreach ($array as $i => $value) { unset($array[$i]); }
print_r($array); // Adding an item $array[] = 6; print_r($array); // Reindexing $array = array_values($array); $array[] = 7; print_r($array); ?> The example above must produce the following exit: Array ( [0] => 1 [1] => 2 [2] => 3 [3] => 4 [4] => 5 ) Array ( ) Array ( [5] => 6 ) Array ( [0] => 6 [1] => 7 )
. <?php $a = array( 'color' => 'red', 'flavor' => 'sweet', 'form' => 'round', 'name' => 'apple', 4// key 0 ); // or $a['color'] = 'red'; $a['flavor'] = 'sweet'; $a['form'] = 'round'; $a['name'] ='apple'; $a[] = 4; // key 0 $b[] = 'a'; $b[] = 'b'; $b[] = 'c'; // array( 0 => 'a' , 1 => 'b' , 2 => 'c' ), // or array('a', 'b', 'c')
?>
break
Break cancels the execution of commands like foreach while, do. .while or switch current. Break accepts an optional numerical argument. <?php $arr = array ('um', 'dois', 'trs', 'quatro', 'STOP', 'cinco'); while (list (, $val) = each ($arr)) { if ($val == 'STOP') { break; } echo "$val \n"; }
$i = 0; while (++$i) { switch ($i) { case 5: echo "No 5 \n"; break 1; case 10: echo "N# 10; \n"; break 2; default: break; } } ?>
Continue
Continue is used inside of loops structures to jump out the current Loop remaining portion of the iteration and to continue the execution at the beginning of the next iteration. <?php while (list ($key, $value) = each ($arr)) { if (!($key % 2)) { continue; } do_something_odd ($value); } $i = 0; while ($i++ < 5) { echo "Out \n"; while (1) { echo " Middle \n"; while (1) {
echo " Inside \n"; continue 3; } echo "It will never be displayed. \n"; } echo "Neither this \n"; } ?>
date
(PHP 3, PHP 4 ) date - Format the date and local hour.
Description
string date ( string format [, int timestamp]) String in accordance with returns one the format from string using the given whole number timestamp or to the local current hour if no teamses tamp is given. In other words,timestamp is optional and the standard for the value of time. Table1. The following characters are recognized in format to parameter string. format Description character a Exemples (return values)
Lowercase Ante meridiem and Post am or pm meridiem Uppercase Ante meridiem and Post AM ou PM meridiem Swatch Internet time 000 at 999
B d
Dia do ms, 2 digitos com leading 01 to 31 zeros Text representing day, with 3 letters Mon through Sun Text representing month January through December 1 a 12 0 a 23 01 a 12 00 a 23 00 para 59
D F
g G h H i
12-hour format no leading zeros 24-hour format no leading zeros 12-hour format with leading zeros 24-hour format with leading zeros Minutes with leading zeros
summer time
1 summer time, 0 no summer time 1 to 31 Sunday through Saturday 1 leep year, 0 not leep year
j l
Day no leading zeros Text representing week days
leep year
m M
Month (numeric) with leading zeros 01 a 12 Text representing month in short (3 Jan a Dec letters) Month (numeric) no leading zeros 1 a 12
n O
Diferena ao horrio de Greenwich Example: +0200 (GMT) em horas RFC 822 formatted date Example: Thu, 21 Dec 2000 16:01:07 +0200 00 a 59
s S
Seconds with leading zeros
Sufixo ordinal ingls para o dia do st, nd, rd ou th. ms, 2 caracteres Funciona bem com j Days in a month Timezone setting 28 a 31 Examples: EST, MDT ...
t T
Seconds since the Unix Epoch See also time() (January 1 1970 00:00:00 GMT) week day numeric 0 (for Sunday) through 6 (for Saturday)
ISO-8601 week number of year, Example: 42 (the weeks starting on Monday (added in 42nd week in the PHP 4.1.0) year) Year with 4 digits Examples: 1999 ou 2003 Examples: 99 ou 03
Year with 2 digits
z Z
Day in a year
0 a 366 at
Timezone offset in seconds. The -43200 offset for timezones west of UTC is 43200 always negative, and for those east of UTC is always positive.
Example 1. date() examples

<?php // Prints something like: Wednesday echo date("l"); // Prints something like: Wednesday 15th of January 2003 05:51:38 AM echo date ("l dS of F Y h:i:s A"); // Prints: July 1, 2000 is on a Saturday echo "July 1, 2000 is on a " . date ("l", mktime(0,0,0,7,1,2000)); ?>
<?php // Assuming today is: March 10th, 2001, 5:16:18 pm $today = date("F j, Y, g:i a"); // March 10, 2001, 5:16 pm $today = date("m.d.y"); // 03.10.01 $today = date("j, n, Y"); // 10, 3, 2001 $today = date("Ymd"); // 20010310 $today = date('h-i-s, j-m-y, it is w Day z '); // 05-16-17, 10-03-01, 1631 1618 6 Fripm01 $today = date('\i\t \i\s \t\h\e jS \d\a\y.'); // It is the 10th day. $today = date("D M j G:i:s T Y"); // Sat Mar 10 15:16:08 MST 2001 $today = date('H:m:s \m \i\s\ \m\o\n\t\h'); // 17:03:17 m is month $today = date("H:i:s"); // 17:16:17 ?>
do..while
Loops do. .while is similar to loop, except for the fact of that the condition is verified in the end of each iteration instead of in the start. The main difference of loops while regular is that the first iteration of a Loop of .while guaranteeing is executed (the condition alone is verified in the end of the iteration) whereas it can necessarily not twirl in a normal Loop while (the condition is verified in the start of each iteration, if it is evaluated as FALSE soon in the start, the execution of the Loop would finish immediately). It has only syntax for loops of while: <?php $i = 0; do { print $i; } while ($i > 0);
?>
Loop above would twirl accurately one time, since that after the first iteration, when the condition is verified, it is evaluated as it FALSE isn?t greater who zero 0) and the execution of the Loop finishes. Advanced users of C can be made familiar to the differentiated use of the Loop of .while, allowing to the end of the execution in the way them code blocks, generalizing them with it .while (0), and using the instruction break. I break up it of code following demonstrates this:
<?php do {if ($i < 5) {print "i is not big enough ";break;}$i *= $factor;if ($i < $minimum_limit) {break;}print "i is Ok";/* process i */} while(0);?> If it doesn?t worry if you it did not understand this of the certain form no way or. You can codify simple or exactly powerful scripts without using this ?resource?.
else
Frequently you go to want executing an instruction if a certain condition will be found and a different instruction if the condition will not be found. That is what else makes. Else extends to a command if to execute an instruction case the expression in the command if either evaluated as it FALSE. For example, the code to follow would show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b and it isn?t greater that b contrary case: <?php if ($a > $b) { echo "a is greater than b"; } else { echo "a is NOT greater than b"; } ?> The command else is only executed if the expression if will be evaluated as FALSE, and if having any expression elseif, if all they will only be evaluated as it also FALSE (it sees elseif).
elseif
elseif, as its name suggests, is a combination of if and else. In the same way that else, it extends to a command if executing a different instruction in the case of the original expression if to be evaluated as FALSE. However, in contrast to else, it will only execute that alternative expression if the conditional expression of elseif will be evaluated as TRUE. For example, the code following would show it is greater that b, a it is equal the b or it she is minor who b: <?php if ($a > $b) { echo "a is bigger than b"; } elseif ($a == $b) { echo "a is equal to b"; } else { echo "a is smaller than b"; } ?> If can have several inside of the same instruction. The first expression elseif(it will be had) that it will be evaluated as TRUE will be executed. In the PHP, you also it can write ?else if? (in two words) and the behavior will be identical to one 'elseif' (in one alone word). The meaning syntactic is slightly different (if you are made familiar to C, them you have behavior the same), but in the end of accounts both would have the same behavior accurately. The command is only executed if the preceding expression if and any previous expressions elseif will be evaluated as FALSE, and the current expression elseif will be evaluated as TRUE.
for
Loops will be is the bows most complex in PHP. They behave as its compatible in C. syntax of a Loop will be is:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3) instructions
The first expression (expr1) is evaluated (executed) a time unconditionally in the start of the Loop. In the start of each iteration, expr2 is evaluated. If it is evaluated as TRUE, the Loop continue and (s) the command (s) nestled (s) (they are) is executed (s). If she is evaluated as SHE FALSE, the execution of the 'Loop' finishes. In the end of each iteration,expr3 is evaluated (executed). Each one of the expressions can be empty.expr2> empty means that the Loop can twirl indefinitely (PHP considers it implicitly as TRUE, as in C). This can?t be so useless how much you can think, therefore frequently you can want to finish the 'Loop' using a break conditional instruction instead of using the expression-truth of it you will be. It considers the following examples. All they show to numbers of 1 the 10:
<?php /* example 1 */ for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; $i++) { print $i; } /* example 2 */ for ($i = 1; ; $i++) { if ($i > 10) { break; } print $i; } /* example 3 */ $i = 1; for (;;) { if ($i > 10) { break; } print $i; $i++; } /* example 4 */ for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; print $i, $i++); ?>
The first example seems to be prettiest (or perhaps the room), but you can perceive that the possible use of empty expressions in bows will be if it becomes practical in some occasions. The PHP also supports the alternative syntax of two-points bows will be:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3): instructions; ...; endfor;
foreach
The PHP4 (but not it PHP3) includes a constructor foreach, much similar to the Perl and other languages. This offers an easy way to iterar on matrices. foreach only functions with arrays, and will launch an error if to try to use it in an variable of any different type or in variable not initialized. It has two syntaxes; second it is an abbreviation, but useful, of the first one: foreach (expressao_array as $valor) instructions foreach (expressao_array as $chave => $valor) instructions The first form sweeps one given first one given for expression_array. In each Loop, the value of the current element is attributed the $value and the internal hand of the matrix is advanced in a position (thus, in the next iteration you it will be looking at for the next element). The second form makes the same thing, except for the fact of that the key of the current element will be
attributed to the 0 variable $key in each iteration.
Note: When foreach initiates its first execution, the internal hand of the matrix is zeroed automatically for the first element of the Array. This means that you do not need to call reset() before a Loop foreach.
Note: It also notices that foreach operates on a copy of the specified Array, not it proper Array, and therefore, the hand of the original Array is not modified as in the instruction each(), that it modifies the element of the selected Array, but this doesn?t reflect the original Array. However, the internal hand of the original Array is put into motion by the processing of the Array. Assuming that the bow foreach twirls until the end, the internal hand of the Array will be located in the end of the Array.
Note: foreach has the ability to prevent messages of error with ?@?. You can have noticed that following items is functionally identical: <?php $arr = array("one", "two", "three"); reset ($arr); while (list(, $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Valor: $value \n"; } foreach ($arr as $value) { echo "Valor: $value \n"; } ?> The following are also functionally identical: <?php reset ($arr); while (list($key, $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value \n"; } foreach ($arr as $key => $value) { echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value \n"; } ?> More examples to demonstrate the uses:
Functions defined for the user

A function can be defined using it syntax as the following one: Pseudo code to demonstrate function uses <?php function foo($arg_1, $arg_2, /* ..., */ $arg_n) {
echo "Example function.\n"; return $retval; } ?>
Any valid code PHP can appear inside of a function, exactly other functions and definitions of classrooms. When a function is defined conditionally as in the two examples below, its definition can be processed before<\I> being called. Conditional functions <?php $makefoo = true; /* We can't call foo() from here since it doesn't exist yet, but we can call bar() */ bar(); if ($makefoo) { function foo() { echo "I don't exist until program execution reaches me.\n"; } } /* Now we can safely call foo() since $makefoo evaluated to true */ if ($makefoo) foo(); function bar() { echo "I exist immediately upon program start.\n"; } ?>
Functions within functions <?php function foo() { function bar() { echo "I don't exist until foo() is called.\n"; } } /* We can't call bar() yet since it doesn't exist. */
foo(); /* Now we can call bar(), foo()'s processesing has made it accessible. */ bar(); ?>
The PHP doesn?t support overload of functions, and also it isn?t possible to cancel or to modify the definition of functions previously declared. Note: Names of functions are insensitive to the case, but it is better to call the functions in the same way that it appears in the declarations.
if
The construction if is the one of the most important implementations of many languages, including PHP. Allows the conditional execution of fragments of code. The PHP implements a structure if that it is similar to that one of the C: /P> if (express) instructions
As described in the section on expressions, expression is evaluated by its Boolean context. If expression will be evaluated as TRUE, the PHP will execute instructors, and it will have evaluated itself as FALSE, will be ignored. More information on the evaluation for FALSE can be found in the section converting for Boolean. The examples to follow would show that it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b: <?php if ($a > $b) print "a is grater than b"; ?>
Frequently you go to want having more than an instruction is executed conditionally. And is clearly, does not have necessity of generalize each instruction with a clause if. Instead of this, you can place some instructions in a grouping of commands. For example, this code would show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b, and then would attribute the value of $a for $b: <?php if ($a > $b) { print "a is grater than b"; $b = $a; } ?>
Commands if can inside indefinitely be nestled of other commands if, what it makes with that you completes flexibility for the conditional execution of some parts of its program.
ltrim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 ) ltrim -- It removes whitespace of the beginning of string.
Description
string ltrim ( string str [, string charlist])
Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4.1.0 This function returns one string with whitespace removed from the beginning of str. Without as the parameter, ltrim() will remove these characters: " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), um espao normal. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), uma tabulao. "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), uma linha nova (line feed). "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), um retono de carro. "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), o byte NULL. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), uma tabulao vertical. You also can specify which characters you want removing, through the parameter charlist. Simply he lists all the characters that you want removing. With you can specify an interval of characters.
Example ltrim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ... "; $trimmed = ltrim($text); // $trimmed ="These are a few words :) ... " $trimmed = ltrim($text," \t."); // $trimmed = "These are a few words :) ... " $clean = ltrim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F"); // trim the ASCII control characters at the beginning of $binary // (from 0 to 31 inclusive) ?>
rtrim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
rtrim -- It
removes blank space of the end of string.
Description
string rtrim ( string str [, string charlist])
Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4.1.0 This function returns string as the removed spaces blank from the end of str. Without as the parameter, rtrim() will go to remove the following characters: " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), an ordinary space. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), a tab. "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), a new line (line feed). "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), a carriage return. "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), the NUL-byte. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), a vertical tab.
You also can specify the characters that you desire removing, for the parameter charlist. Simply he lists all the characters that you want to see removed. With you can specify an interval of characters. Example funtion rtrim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ... "; $trimmed = rtrim($text); // $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ..." $trimmed = rtrim($text," \t."); // $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :)" $clean = rtrim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F"); // retira os caracteres de controle ASCII ao final de $binary // (de 0 at ?>
str_replace
(PHP 3>= 3.0.6, PHP 4 ) str_replace -- Replace all occurrences of the search string with the replacement string.
Description
mixed str_replace ( mixed search, mixed replace, mixed subject [, int &count]) This function returns a string or an array with all occurrences of search in subject replaced with the given replace value. If you don't need fancy replacing rules, you should always use this function instead of ereg_replace() or preg_replace(). As of PHP 4.0.5, every parameter in str_replace() can be an array. If subject is an array, then the search and replace is performed with every entry of subject, and the return value is an array as well. If search and replace are arrays, then str_replace() takes a value from each array and uses them to do search and replace on subject. If replace has fewer values than search, then an empty string is used for the rest of replacement values. If search is an array and replace is a string; then this replacement string is used for every value of search. str_replace() examples <?php // Provides: <body text='black'> $bodytag = str_replace("%body%", "black", "<body text='%body%'>"); // Provides: Hll Wrld f PHP $vowels = array("a", "e", "i", "o", "u", "A", "E", "I", "O", "U"); $onlyconstants = str_replace($vowels, "", "Hello World of PHP"); // Provides: You should eat pizza, beer, and ice cream every day $phrase = "You should eat fruits, vegetables, and fiber every day."; $healthy = array("fruits", "vegetables", "fiber"); $yummy = array("pizza", "beer", "ice cream"); $newphrase $phrase); = str_replace($healthy, $yummy,
// Use of the count parameter is available as of PHP 5.0.0 $str = str_replace("ll", "", "good golly miss molly!", $count); echo $count; // 2 ?>
Note: This function is compatible with binary data.
strpos
(PHP 3, PHP 4 ) strpos -- String finds the position of the first occurrence of one.
Description
int strpos ( string haystack, string needle [, int offset]) It inside returns the numerical position from the first occurrence of needle of haystack. Differently of strrpos(), this function can have one string entire as the parameter needle and all string will be used. If needlewill not be found, strpos() will go to return B>boole FALSE. Warning This function may return Boolean FALSE, but may also return a non-Boolean value which evaluates to FALSE, such as0 or "". Please read the section on Booleans for more information. Use the === operator for testing the return value of this function. Example strpos() <?php $mystring = 'abc'; $findme = 'a'; $pos = strpos($mystring, $findme); // Note our use of ===. Simply == would not work as expected // because the position of 'a' was the 0th (first) character. if ($pos === false) { echo "The string '$findme' was not found in the string '$mystring'"; } else { echo "The string '$findme' was found in the string '$mystring'"; echo " and exists at position $pos"; } ?>
If the parameter needle isn?t a string, is converted for a whole number and applied the value of the character. The optional parameter offset allows you defining from which character in haystack to initiate the search. The position still return is relative to the beginning ofhaystack.
substr
(PHP 3, PHP 4 ) substr -- String returns a part from one.
Description
string substr ( string string, int start [, int length]) substr()it returns the part from string specified by the parameter start and length. If start will not be negative, string returned will initiate in the position startin string, starting in zero. For example, in string 'abcdef', the character in position 0 is 'a', the character in position 2 it is 'c', and thus in ahead. Basic use of substr() <?php $rest = substr("abcdef", 1); // returns "bcdef" $rest = substr("abcdef", 1, 3); // returns "bcd" $rest = substr("abcdef", 0, 4); // returns "abcd" $rest = substr("abcdef", 0, 8); // returns "abcdef" // Another option is access it using curly brackets $string = 'abcdef'; echo $string{0}; // returns a echo $string{3}; // returns d ?>
If start will be negative, string returned will go starting in the character start from the end of string. Example 2. Using a negative start <?php $rest = substr("abcdef", -1); // returns "f" $rest = substr("abcdef", -2); // returns "ef" $rest = substr("abcdef", -3, 1); // returns "d" ?>
If length will be given and will be positive, string returned will go to contain length characters starting in start (depending on the size of string). If string is lesser from what start, will be returned FALSE. If length will be given and will be negative, then this amount characters will be omitted of the end of string (after the beginning position to have been calculated when start will be negative). If start denotes a position beyond truncate, one string empty will be returned. Example 3. Using negative length <?php $rest = substr("abcdef", 0, -1); // returns "abcde" $rest = substr("abcdef", 2, -1); // returns "cde" $rest = substr("abcdef", 4, -4); // returns "" $rest = substr("abcdef", -3, -1); // returns "de" ?>
substr_replace
(PHP 4 ) substr_replace -- Replace text within a portion of a string.
Description
string substr_replace ( string string, string replacement, int start [, int length]) substr_replace() replaces a copy of string delimited by the start and (optionally) length parameters with the string given in replacement. The result is returned. If start is positive, the replacing will begin at the start'th offset into string. If start is negative, the replacing will begin at the start'th character from the end of string. If length is given and is positive, it represents the length of the portion of string which is to be replaced. If it is negative, it represents the number of characters from the end of string at which to stop replacing. If it is not given, then it will default to strlen( string ); i.e. end the replacing at the end of string. substr_replace() example <?php $var = 'ABCDEFGH:/MNRPQR/'; echo "Original: $var<hr>\n"; /* These two examples replace all of $var with 'bob'. */ echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0) . " \n"; echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0, strlen($var)) . " \n"; /* Insert 'bob' right at the beginning of $var. */ echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0, 0) . " \n"; /* These next two replace 'MNRPQR' in $var with 'bob'. */ echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 10, -1) . " \n"; echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', -7, -1) . " \n"; /* Delete 'MNRPQR' from $var. */ echo substr_replace($var, '', 10, -1) . " \n"; ?>
trim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 ) trim -- Removes space in the begin and end of one string.
Description
string( string str [, string charlist]) Note: The optional parameter charlist was added in PHP 4.1.0 This function returns one string with the removed spaces from the beginning and the end of str. Without as the parameter, trim() will go to remove these characters. " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), um espao normal. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), uma tabulao. "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), uma linha nova (line feed). "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), um retono de carro. "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), o byte NULL. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), uma tabulao vertical. You also can specify which characters you want to removing, through the parameter charlist. Simply he lists all the characters that you want removing. With you can specify an interval of characters. Example trim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ... "; $trimmed = trim($text); // $trimmed = "These are a few words :) ..." $trimmed = trim($text," \t."); // $trimmed = "These are a few words :)" $clean = trim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F"); // trim the ASCII control characters at the beginning and end of $binary // (from 0 to 31 inclusive) ?>
while
Loops while is the simples type t to create a ? Loop? in PHP. They behave as its compatible ones in C. The basic format of a command while is: while(expression) instructions
The meaning of a command while is simple. It asks for that the PHP executes the nestled commands
repeated, while the expression of while is evaluated as TRUE. The value of the expression is verified each time that if passes in the start of the 'Loop', in such a way, exactly that this value moves during the execution of (s) the command (s) nestled (s), the execution will not stop until the end of the iteration (each time that the PHP inside executes the commands of the 'Loop' is an iteration. To the times, if the expression while is evaluated as IT FALSE soon at the beginning, the command (s) nestled will not be twirled (s) nor a time at least.
As in the command if, you can group multiples inside commands of the same bow while generalizing a group of instructions with keys, or using the alternative syntax:
while (expressao): instrucoes ... endwhile; <?php /* exemple 1 */ $i = 1; while ($i <= 10) { print $i++; } /* exemple 2 */ $i = 1; while ($i <= 10): print $i; $i++; endwhile; ?>
CALLING ACTIVEX
EX1: $obj = new COM("security.csecurity"); $obj->repass_conection( "demo;[glo_server];[glo_banck];[glo_user];[glo_password];Sql server"); $obj->valid_user({user}, {password}); {fieldPHP} = $obj->retorn_status; // the code below calls an ActiveX objecto , methods and attributes // PHP suports COM tecnology EX2: $obj = new COM("sc.valid"); {return} = $obj->valid("[glo_user]"); $obj->release(); $obj = null; if($retorno == err) { sc_err_message(invalid user) }
Sql
INSERT
In SQL language the only way to add data to a table is using the INSERT statement like the following: INSERT INTO adm_Category (CategoryID,NameCategory,Photo) VALUES (9,'CAR','carros.gif')
UPDATE
It updates a given line.
UPDATE adm_category SET NameCategory 'rent car' WHERE CategoryId = 9
DELETE
Exclude a given table line. DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId = 9 /*it eliminates in the table adm_category the line with category code equal 9 *
Commands INSERT, UPDATE E DELETE in the ScriptCase.
To execute these commands the ScriptCase use the macro sc_exec_sql. sc_exec_sql('DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId =9');
QUERY
Use the Query statement to search a given DB table. A Query has at least two components: SELECT : It enumerates the columns name that contains the desired data. FROM : It specifies the tables where the columns are located.
Ex.: SELECT categoryId,NameCategory,Photo FROM adm_category;
WHERE
It returns only the values from the lines that satisfies the conditions specified in the WHERE clause.
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE Sex = 'M'
Operators Description = != <> > < !< !> >= <= equal Not equal Different Higher Shorter Not Shorter Not Higher Higher or equal Shorter or equal
BETWEEN - AND : It specifies data range. SELECT CustomersId,NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE BETWEEN '1997-01-01' AND '1997-04-31' SELECT SupplierId,Name_supplier FROM adm_supplier WHERE SupplierId BETWEEN 1 AND 9
IS NUL : Select lines where the content of the field is null (EMPTY). SELECT CustomersId FROM adm_order WHERE DateOrder IS NULL
LIKE : Use masks in conditions to compare text values: Substitute only one character: _ or? ; Substitute a sequence of characters: % or *. SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers LIKE 'RIC%'; SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers<LIKE 'J_A_';
IN : Selects data from a given set or lists.
SELECT CustomersId,NameCustomers ('ABCDE','ZXED','WW3CD')
FROM
adm_Customers
WHERE
IN
Operators AND and OR

Allows to use more than one condition in one WHERE clause.
SELECT P.ValueOrderFROM adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE (CustomersId ='CustomersId') AND (P.dateOrder IS NULL AND C.CustomersId = 'ABCDE')
Arithmetical operators
+ * / Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division
In the example to follow, we add 0,05 to Customer ???ABCDE??? order value.
SELECT DISTINCT C.CustomersId, C. NameCustomers,P.ValueOrder + 0,05 AS DISCOUNTING FROM adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE C.CustomersId = P.CustomersId AND CustomersId= 'ABCDE'
Concatenation Operator
In the MySQL the function concat implements the concatenation functionality: SELECT concat(Name Customers " Happy Birthday???)from admCustomers where month (DateBirth)= month(now()) AND day(DataBirth) = day(now()); ;
Note the use of the functions day, month e now, that manipulate date type fields.
Functions
Use functions to perform the operations on query results.
Aggregate functions They produce one value from an entire data column. They are also called column functions. AVG: Calculates the query selected items average. SELECT AVG(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orderP CLASS="western" STYLE="margin-bottom: 0cm"> MAX : Returns the max value from the query selected items. SELECT MAX(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order
MIN: min value from the query selected items.
SELECT MIN(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order;
SUM : Returns the sum of all items for the selected column. SELECT SUM(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orders
COUNT : Returns the line count (number of records) of a query result. SELECT COUNT(*)adm_Customers;
Not Aggregate functions Return a value for each line.
MID : Display a part of a text. For example, it lists all the customers with only the 5 first characters of its name. SELECT MID(NameCustomers,1,5) FROM adm_Customers;
UCASE : Returns a text in capital letters. SELECT UCASE(NamCustomers FROM adm_Customers LCASE : Returns a text in lower case. SELECT LCASE(NameCustomers) FROM adm_Customers
LENGTH : Returns the amount of characters from a field/text/P> SELECT LENGTH(Namesupplie) FROM adm_supplies
Breaks and Organization

Clauses that can be added to a query to organize the results. GROUP BY Used to group lines in the result. SELECT F.Namesupplier,P.NameProduct FROM P.SupplierId= F. SupplierId GROUP BY F. SupplierId adm_supplier F, adm_product P WHERE
Aggregate Functions cannot be used in GROUP BY clause.
HAVING Apply search conditions to the lines in GROUP BY clause. For example :
SELECT CustomersId MAX(ValueOrder),MIN(ValueOrder),MAX(ValueOrder) ??? MIN(ValueOrder) as Differences FROM adm_pedidos GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING MAX( ValueOrder)MIN(ValueOrder) > 12700; List all the customers who had made more than 20. SELECT CustomersId COUNT(CustomersId) FROM adm_order GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING COUNT(CustomersId) > 20;;
ORDER BY Order (sort) the lines (records).

ScriptCase PDF en Us

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ScriptCase PDF en Us

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Introduction Introduction

Scriptcase Installation Overview

Starting the ScriptCase installation

Read the license agreement terms and click Next.

Select the directory to install the ScriptCase and click Install.

Click finish to complete the installation process.

Windows Manual Installation

Select the language (English) to use during the installation.

The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.

Create a login id and password to the ScriptCase administrator

ScriptCase login screen.

Zend Optimizer Installed.

Module MBSTRING enabled.

Module ZIP enabled.

After download extract ScriptCase ZIP in the web server root.

Rename the extracted folder to scriptcase.

< Check enabled extensions

Create a login id and password to the ScriptCase administrator

ScriptCase login window.

Instala??o Scriptcase - Linux Installer

ScriptCase Linux - Installer

Steps of the Zend Server CE configuration.

Final Step: Configuration screen of the Zend Server CE environment.

Installing Php In Iis5

Image2: Click in advanced to list all possible user.

Image4: Select the IUSR_SERVERNAME user and click in OK.

Image6: And to ScriptCase directory.

PHP Configuration in IIS

Image1: Execute IIS from the Control Panel/Administrative Tools

Image3: In Home Directory, Click in Configuration.

Image4: In Mappings click in Add.

*Note: to configure PHP in ISAPI mode use php5isapi.dll instead php-cgi.exe

Installing Php In Iis6

Image2: Click on "advanced" to list all possible users.

Image4: Select the IUSR_SERVERNAME user and click OK.

Image7: Click on Configuration.

Image8: Click oin Add to create a new extension pointing to PHP.

After you download, mount the dmg file by clicking on it:

Just follow the steps:

Now choose the admin password.

< Check enabled extensions

Create a login id and password to the ScriptCase administrator

ScriptCase login window.

Accessing Scriptcase User Authentication

Image1: Login interface.

After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed.

Scriptcase Workspace Layout Overview

Workspace layout Overview

Image1: Workspace Layout Interface.

1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List

Image1: Main menu interface.

Hierarchic Menu options:

ScriptCase functionality icons:

Image1: TaskBar Interface.

Image1: Project Explorer.

Image1 : New Project.

Image2:Creating a new project.

Image3: Selecting project locales

Themes - Define themes available to the applications.

Image 4: Selecting themes for the project.

Image 01: Create new project screen.

Image1: Project Properties Interface.

Image2: Edit Project Interface.